US20070052977A1 - Method and apparatus for end-point detection - Google Patents
Method and apparatus for end-point detection Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20070052977A1 US20070052977A1 US11/595,311 US59531106A US2007052977A1 US 20070052977 A1 US20070052977 A1 US 20070052977A1 US 59531106 A US59531106 A US 59531106A US 2007052977 A1 US2007052977 A1 US 2007052977A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- wafer
- electropolishing
- nozzle
- metal layer
- polishing
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 207
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 title description 33
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 claims abstract description 242
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 242
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 151
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 claims description 195
- 239000003792 electrolyte Substances 0.000 claims description 132
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 claims description 40
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 claims description 31
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 claims description 17
- 238000001579 optical reflectometry Methods 0.000 abstract description 9
- 235000012431 wafers Nutrition 0.000 description 755
- 238000007772 electroless plating Methods 0.000 description 75
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 69
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 61
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 50
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 47
- 238000009713 electroplating Methods 0.000 description 36
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 35
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 35
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 35
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 28
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 26
- 238000011068 loading method Methods 0.000 description 25
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 24
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 23
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 23
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 23
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 22
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 21
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- 238000007517 polishing process Methods 0.000 description 16
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 15
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 13
- 238000000137 annealing Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000002310 reflectometry Methods 0.000 description 11
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphoric acid Chemical compound OP(O)(O)=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 10
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000000356 contaminant Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000008367 deionised water Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229910021641 deionized water Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 229910001873 dinitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 238000011536 re-plating Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000007747 plating Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 7
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229910021645 metal ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- -1 Xerogel Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000005260 corrosion Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 5
- 235000011007 phosphoric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 238000009428 plumbing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 0 C**(CCC1)C2C1C*C*(*C)C(CCCCC(C1)C3CCCC1(C)*(C)C)*C1C3(C)C1(C)C2 Chemical compound C**(CCC1)C2C1C*C*(*C)C(CCCCC(C1)C3CCCC1(C)*(C)C)*C1C3(C)C1(C)C2 0.000 description 4
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 4
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000007797 corrosion Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 235000012239 silicon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 4
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formaldehyde Chemical compound O=C WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000002411 adverse Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910000147 aluminium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005240 physical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229920003209 poly(hydridosilsesquioxane) Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004809 Teflon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920006362 Teflon® Polymers 0.000 description 2
- NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium nitride Chemical compound [Ti]#N NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011065 in-situ storage Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011133 lead Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum nitride Chemical compound [Ta]#N MZLGASXMSKOWSE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 2
- JBRZTFJDHDCESZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N AsGa Chemical compound [As]#[Ga] JBRZTFJDHDCESZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004801 Chlorinated PVC Substances 0.000 description 1
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JPVYNHNXODAKFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cu2+ Chemical compound [Cu+2] JPVYNHNXODAKFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Fluoride anion Chemical compound [F-] KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229910001218 Gallium arsenide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tin Chemical compound [Sn] ATJFFYVFTNAWJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052770 Uranium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004964 aerogel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001458 anti-acid effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010923 batch production Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052793 cadmium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N cadmium atom Chemical compound [Cd] BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012512 characterization method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003486 chemical etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000457 chlorinated polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910001431 copper ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000365 copper sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ARUVKPQLZAKDPS-UHFFFAOYSA-L copper(II) sulfate Chemical compound [Cu+2].[O-][S+2]([O-])([O-])[O-] ARUVKPQLZAKDPS-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005137 deposition process Methods 0.000 description 1
- KTQYJQFGNYHXMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N dichloro(methyl)silicon Chemical compound C[Si](Cl)Cl KTQYJQFGNYHXMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008151 electrolyte solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052738 indium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium atom Chemical compound [In] APFVFJFRJDLVQX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000005048 methyldichlorosilane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001393 microlithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011148 porous material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003908 quality control method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010948 rhodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodium atom Chemical compound [Rh] MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002002 slurry Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- XGZGDYQRJKMWNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum tungsten Chemical compound [Ta][W][Ta] XGZGDYQRJKMWNM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BFKJFAAPBSQJPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrafluoroethene Chemical compound FC(F)=C(F)F BFKJFAAPBSQJPD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052718 tin Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011135 tin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005641 tunneling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001039 wet etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B24—GRINDING; POLISHING
- B24B—MACHINES, DEVICES, OR PROCESSES FOR GRINDING OR POLISHING; DRESSING OR CONDITIONING OF ABRADING SURFACES; FEEDING OF GRINDING, POLISHING, OR LAPPING AGENTS
- B24B49/00—Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work; Arrangements of indicating or measuring equipment, e.g. for indicating the start of the grinding operation
- B24B49/10—Measuring or gauging equipment for controlling the feed movement of the grinding tool or work; Arrangements of indicating or measuring equipment, e.g. for indicating the start of the grinding operation involving electrical means
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B24—GRINDING; POLISHING
- B24B—MACHINES, DEVICES, OR PROCESSES FOR GRINDING OR POLISHING; DRESSING OR CONDITIONING OF ABRADING SURFACES; FEEDING OF GRINDING, POLISHING, OR LAPPING AGENTS
- B24B37/00—Lapping machines or devices; Accessories
- B24B37/005—Control means for lapping machines or devices
- B24B37/013—Devices or means for detecting lapping completion
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C25—ELECTROLYTIC OR ELECTROPHORETIC PROCESSES; APPARATUS THEREFOR
- C25F—PROCESSES FOR THE ELECTROLYTIC REMOVAL OF MATERIALS FROM OBJECTS; APPARATUS THEREFOR
- C25F3/00—Electrolytic etching or polishing
- C25F3/16—Polishing
- C25F3/22—Polishing of heavy metals
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C25—ELECTROLYTIC OR ELECTROPHORETIC PROCESSES; APPARATUS THEREFOR
- C25F—PROCESSES FOR THE ELECTROLYTIC REMOVAL OF MATERIALS FROM OBJECTS; APPARATUS THEREFOR
- C25F7/00—Constructional parts, or assemblies thereof, of cells for electrolytic removal of material from objects; Servicing or operating
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N21/00—Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
- G01N21/17—Systems in which incident light is modified in accordance with the properties of the material investigated
- G01N21/55—Specular reflectivity
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/02—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/04—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof the devices having potential barriers, e.g. a PN junction, depletion layer or carrier concentration layer
- H01L21/18—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof the devices having potential barriers, e.g. a PN junction, depletion layer or carrier concentration layer the devices having semiconductor bodies comprising elements of Group IV of the Periodic Table or AIIIBV compounds with or without impurities, e.g. doping materials
- H01L21/30—Treatment of semiconductor bodies using processes or apparatus not provided for in groups H01L21/20 - H01L21/26
- H01L21/31—Treatment of semiconductor bodies using processes or apparatus not provided for in groups H01L21/20 - H01L21/26 to form insulating layers thereon, e.g. for masking or by using photolithographic techniques; After treatment of these layers; Selection of materials for these layers
- H01L21/3205—Deposition of non-insulating-, e.g. conductive- or resistive-, layers on insulating layers; After-treatment of these layers
- H01L21/321—After treatment
- H01L21/32115—Planarisation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/02—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/04—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof the devices having potential barriers, e.g. a PN junction, depletion layer or carrier concentration layer
- H01L21/18—Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof the devices having potential barriers, e.g. a PN junction, depletion layer or carrier concentration layer the devices having semiconductor bodies comprising elements of Group IV of the Periodic Table or AIIIBV compounds with or without impurities, e.g. doping materials
- H01L21/30—Treatment of semiconductor bodies using processes or apparatus not provided for in groups H01L21/20 - H01L21/26
- H01L21/31—Treatment of semiconductor bodies using processes or apparatus not provided for in groups H01L21/20 - H01L21/26 to form insulating layers thereon, e.g. for masking or by using photolithographic techniques; After treatment of these layers; Selection of materials for these layers
- H01L21/3205—Deposition of non-insulating-, e.g. conductive- or resistive-, layers on insulating layers; After-treatment of these layers
- H01L21/321—After treatment
- H01L21/3213—Physical or chemical etching of the layers, e.g. to produce a patterned layer from a pre-deposited extensive layer
- H01L21/32133—Physical or chemical etching of the layers, e.g. to produce a patterned layer from a pre-deposited extensive layer by chemical means only
- H01L21/32134—Physical or chemical etching of the layers, e.g. to produce a patterned layer from a pre-deposited extensive layer by chemical means only by liquid etching only
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/70—Manufacture or treatment of devices consisting of a plurality of solid state components formed in or on a common substrate or of parts thereof; Manufacture of integrated circuit devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/71—Manufacture of specific parts of devices defined in group H01L21/70
- H01L21/768—Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics
- H01L21/76838—Applying interconnections to be used for carrying current between separate components within a device comprising conductors and dielectrics characterised by the formation and the after-treatment of the conductors
- H01L21/7684—Smoothing; Planarisation
Definitions
- the present invention generally relates to methods and apparatus for electropolishing metal layers on semiconductor wafers. More particularly, the present invention relates to a system for electropolishing interconnections in semiconductor devices formed on semiconductor wafers.
- semiconductor devices are manufactured or fabricated on disks of semiconducting materials called wafers or slices. More particularly, wafers are initially sliced from a silicon ingot. The wafers then undergo multiple masking, etching, and deposition processes to form the electronic circuitry of semiconductor devices.
- interconnections the lines of conductors, which connect elements of a single semiconductor device and/or connect any number of semiconductor devices together.
- the density of interconnections on the devices has increased.
- the closer proximity of interconnections increases the line-to-line capacitance of the interconnections, which results in greater signal delay at the interconnections.
- interconnection delays have been found to increase with the square of the reduction in feature size.
- gate delays i.e., delay at the gates or mesas of semiconductor devices
- copper rather than aluminum to form the metal interconnections.
- One advantage of copper is that it has greater conductivity than aluminum. Also, copper is less resistant to electromigration (meaning that a line formed from copper will have less tendency to thin under current load) than aluminum.
- electromigration meaning that a line formed from copper will have less tendency to thin under current load
- one significant disadvantage to using copper has been its tendency to bleed into the silicon substrate, thus contaminating the semiconductor device.
- CMP chemical mechanical polishing
- the present invention relates to an end-point detector for detecting the end-point of an electropolishing process of a metal layer formed on a wafer.
- the end-point detector is disposed adjacent the nozzle used to electropolish the wafer.
- the end-point detector is configured to measure the optical reflectivity of the portion of the wafer being electropolished.
- FIGS. 1A-1D are cross-section views of a semiconductor wafer in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a flow chart for processing wafers in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 3A-3C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 4A-4D are cross-section views of another wafer in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 5 is another flow chart for processing wafers in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 6A-6C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of another wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 7A is a top view of a portion of an electropolishing apparatus in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 7B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 7 B- 7 B in FIG. 7A , and partly in block diagram form, of the electropolishing apparatus shown in FIG. 7A ;
- FIG. 8 is a plot of various waveforms, which may be used in conjunction with the electropolishing apparatus shown in FIG. 7A ;
- FIG. 9A-9D are top views of a portion of alternative embodiments of electropolishing apparatus in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 10 is a plot of various waveforms depicting a portion of an electropolishing process in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 11A is a top view of a portion of another alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 11B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 11 B- 11 B in FIG. 11A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 11A ;
- FIG. 12A is a top view of a portion of a second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 12B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 12 B- 12 B in FIG. 12A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 12A ;
- FIG. 13A is a top view of a portion of a third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 13B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 13 B- 13 B in FIG. 13A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 13A ;
- FIG. 14A is a top view of a portion of a fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 14B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 14 B- 14 B in FIG. 14A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 14A ;
- FIG. 15 is a cross section view of a fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 16A is a top view of a portion of a sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 16B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 16 B- 16 B in FIG. 16A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 16A ;
- FIG. 17A is a top view of a portion of a seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 17B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 17 B- 17 B in FIG. 17A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 17A ;
- FIG. 18A is a cross section view of an eighth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 18B is a cross section view of a ninth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 19A is a cross section view of a tenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 19B is a cross section view of an eleventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 20A is a top view of a portion of a twelfth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 20B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 20 B- 20 B in FIG. 20A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 20A ;
- FIG. 21A is a top view of a portion of a thirteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 21B is a top view of a portion of a fourteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 22A is a top view of a portion of a fifteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 22B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 22 B- 22 B in FIG. 22A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 22A ;
- FIG. 23A is a top view of a portion of a sixteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 23B is a top view of a portion of a seventeenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 23C is a top view of a portion of an eighteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 24A is a top view of a portion of a nineteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 24B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 24 B- 24 B in FIG. 24A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 24A ;
- FIG. 25 is a top view of a portion of a twentieth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 26 is a top view of a portion of a twenty-first alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 27A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 27B is a top view of a portion of a twenty-third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 27C is a top view of a portion of a twenty-fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 28A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 28B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 28 B- 28 B in FIG. 28A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 28A ;
- FIG. 29A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 29B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 29 B- 29 B in FIG. 29A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 29A ;
- FIG. 30A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 30B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 30 B- 30 B in FIG. 30A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 30A ;
- FIG. 31A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-eighth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 31B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 31 B- 31 B in FIG. 31A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 31A ;
- FIG. 32A is a cross section view of a portion of a twenty-ninth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 32B is a cross section view of a portion of a thirtieth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 32C is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-first alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 32D is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 33 is a top view of a wafer undergoing electropolishing in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 34A is a top view of a portion of a thirty-third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 34B is a top view of a portion of a thirty-fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 34C is a top view of a portion of a thirty-fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 34D is a top view of a portion of a thirty-sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 35A is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 35B is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-eighth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 36A is a top view of a portion of a thirty-ninth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 36B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 36 B- 36 B in FIG. 36A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 36A ;
- FIG. 37 is a set of waveforms depicting a portion of an electropolishing process in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 38A is a top view of a portion of a fortieth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 38B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 38 B- 38 B in FIG. 38A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 38A ;
- FIG. 39A is a top view of a portion of a forty-first alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 39B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 39 B- 39 B in FIG. 39A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 39A ;
- FIG. 40A is a top view of a portion of a forty-second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 40B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 40 B- 40 B in FIG. 40A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 40A ;
- FIG. 41 is a set of waveform diagrams depicting a portion of an electropolishing process in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 42 is additional sets of waveforms, which may be used in conjunction with the present invention.
- FIG. 43A is a top view of a portion of a forty-third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 43B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 43 B- 43 B in FIG. 43A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 43A ;
- FIG. 44A is a top view of a portion of a forty-fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 44B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 44 B- 44 B in FIG. 44A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 44A ;
- FIG. 45 is a view, partly in cross section, and partly in block diagram form, of a forty-fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 46 is a view, partly in cross section, and partly in block diagram form, of a forty-sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 47A-47C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 48 is a flow chart depicting the operation of a portion of software for controlling a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 49A-49C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of still another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 50 is a schematic top view of a portion of yet another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 51 is a schematic top view of a portion of another embodiment of a wafer-processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIGS. 52A-52C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of still another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 53 is a waveform depicting a portion of a wafer processing operation in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 54A is a top view of a portion of a forty-seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- FIG. 54B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along the line 54 B- 54 B in FIG. 54A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown in FIG. 54A ;
- FIG. 55 is a graph depicting the relationship between current and voltage in a pulsed power supply
- FIG. 56 is a graph depicting the relationship between current and voltage in a DC power supply
- FIG. 57 is a graph depicting the relationship between resistance and polishing time
- FIG. 58 is a side view of a portion of an end-point detection system
- FIG. 59 is a graph depicting the relationship between reflection rate and polishing time
- FIG. 60 is a top view of a portion of an end-point detection system
- FIG. 61 is a top view of a portion of another end-point detection system
- FIG. 62 is a top view of a portion of still another end-point detection system
- FIGS. 63A and 64B are schematics of various configurations of end-point detectors
- FIGS. 64A through 64D are schematics of various configurations of end-point detectors
- FIGS. 65A through 65E are cross-sectional views of various end-point detectors
- FIGS. 66A through 66E are cross sectional views of various nozzles
- FIGS. 67A and 67B are schematic side and top views, respectively, of a wafer processing tool
- FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of an embodiment of an electroless plating module
- FIG. 68B is a top cross section view of the embodiment shown in FIG. 68A ;
- FIG. 69A is a front perspective view of another embodiment of an electroless plating module.
- FIG. 69B is a top cross section view of the embodiment shown in FIG. 69A ;
- FIGS. 70A through 70C are top, front cross section, and side cross section views, respectively, of a wafer processing tool
- FIGS. 71A through 71C are top, front cross section, and side cross section views, respectively, of another wafer processing tool.
- FIGS. 72A through 72C are top and two cross sectional views, respectively, of still another wafer processing tool.
- a semiconductor wafer 31 suitably includes a substrate layer 124 . More particularly, in an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, substrate layer 124 preferably includes silicon. It should be recognized, however, that substrate layer 124 can include various semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide and the like, depending on the particular application.
- Semiconductor wafer 31 suitably includes a dielectric layer 123 formed on top of substrate layer 124 .
- dielectric layer 123 preferably includes silicon dioxide (SiO2).
- Dielectric layer 123 can be formed on substrate layer 124 using any convenient deposition method, such as chemical vapor deposition, evaporation, sputtering, and the like.
- dielectric layer 123 can include various materials having dielectric constant (“K”) values lower than that of SiO2, these various materials being generally referred to as low-K materials, such as hydrogen-silsesquioxane (HSQ), Xerogel, polymer, aerogel, and the like.
- K dielectric constant
- SiO2 which has a dielectric constant of about 4.2
- HSQ has a dielectric constant of about 3.0 to 2.5
- Xerogel has a dielectric constant of about 2.0.
- a low-K material provides better electrical isolation. Therefore, the use of a low-K material as dielectric layer 123 can facilitate the formation of semiconductor devices with smaller feature sizes.
- the circuitry for semiconductor devices is suitably formed using any convenient process.
- a damascene process is preferably used. Accordingly, trenches (also known as gaps) 125 and gates (also known as mesas) 126 are formed in dielectric layer 123 using any convenient patterning method, such as photomasking, photolithography, microlithography, and the like.
- barrier layer 122 is suitably formed on top of dielectric layer 123 .
- barrier layer 122 also suitably lines the walls of trenches 125 .
- barrier layer 122 suitably prevents the copper in metal layer 121 from diffusing into dielectric layer 123 .
- barrier layer 122 preferably includes material resistant to the diffusion of copper, such as titanium, tantalum, tungsten, titanium-nitride, tantalum-nitride, tungsten-nitride, and the like.
- Barrier layer 122 can be deposited using any convenient deposition method, such as physical vapor deposition (PVD), chemical vapor deposition (CVD), and the like. It should be recognized, however, that barrier layer 122 can be omitted in some applications. For example, when dielectric layer 123 is formed from a material, which is resistant to diffusion of copper, or when the diffusion of copper into dielectric layer 123 will not adversely affect the performance of the semiconductor device.
- PVD physical vapor deposition
- CVD chemical vapor deposition
- metal layer 121 can be suitably formed on top of barrier layer 122 or formed on top of dielectric layer 123 . Additionally, metal layer 121 is suitably deposited within trench 125 . In the present exemplary embodiment, metal layer 121 preferably includes copper. Accordingly, metal layer 121 is formed on top of barrier layer 122 to suitably prevent the diffusion of copper from metal layer 121 into dielectric layer 123 .
- metal layer 121 can include various electrically conductive materials, such as nickel, chromium, zinc, cadmium, silver, gold, rhodium, palladium, platinum, tin, lead, iron, indium, and the like.
- Metal layer 121 can be formed on barrier layer 122 or on dielectric layer 123 using any convenient method, such as PVD, CVD, and the like. Additionally, metal layer 121 can be formed using an electroplating processing, which is described in copending application Ser. No. 09/232,864, entitled PLATING APPARATUS AND METHOD, filed on Jan. 15, 1999, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- metal layer 121 formed on top of mesas 126 , according to another aspect of the present invention, is suitably electropolished.
- the present invention can be advantageously used in a damascene process, in which the circuitry of a semiconductor device is patterned into trenches or gaps. It should be recognized, however, that the present invention can be used in conjunction with various other processes without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- wafer electropolisher 50 preferably includes polishing receptacle 100 , which is divided into six sections 111 , 112 , 113 , 114 , 115 and 116 by section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 .
- polishing receptacle 100 can be divided into any number of sections by any suitable number of section walls.
- Polishing receptacle 100 and section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 are suitably formed from any convenient material electrically insulated and resistant to acid and corrosion, such as polytetrafluoroethylene (commercially known as TEFLON), PolyVinyl Chloride (PVC), PolyVinylindene Fluoride (PVDF), Polypropylene, and the like.
- polishing receptacle 100 and section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 are preferably formed from PVDF. It should be recognized, however, that polishing receptacle and each section wall 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 can be formed from different materials depending on the particular application.
- electrolyte 34 flows into polishing receptacle 100 through inlets 4 , 6 and 8 suitably formed in sections 111 , 113 and 115 , respectively.
- a pump 33 suitably pumps electrolyte 34 from an electrolyte reservoir 36 to a pass filter 32 and into Liquid Mass Flow Controllers (LMFCs) 21 , 22 and 23 .
- Pass filter 32 suitably filters contaminants from electrolyte 34 . In this manner, contaminants are prevented from entering polishing receptacle 100 and from clogging LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 .
- pass filter 32 suitably removes particles larger than about 0.05 micrometer but smaller than about 0.1 micrometers. It should be recognized, however, that various filtering systems can be used depending on the particular application. Additionally, although filtering contaminants is advantageous, pass filter 32 can be omitted from wafer polisher 50 without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- Electrolyte 34 can include any convenient electroplating fluid, such as phosphoric acid, and the like.
- electrolyte 34 preferably includes orthophosphoric acid (H2PO4) having a concentration between about 60 percent by weight and about 85 percent by weight, and preferably about 76 percent by weight.
- electrolyte 34 preferably includes orthophosphoric acid having about 1 percent aluminum metal (against weight of the acid). It should be recognized, however, that the concentration and composition of electrolyte 34 can vary depending on the particular application.
- Pump 33 can include any convenient hydraulic pump, such as a centrifugal pump, a diaphragm pump, a bellow pump, and the like. Additionally, pump 33 is suitably resistant to acid, corrosion, and contamination. In the present exemplary embodiment, pump 33 includes a diaphragm pump. It should be recognized, as will be depicted and described below in conjunction with alternative embodiments, that two or more pumps 33 can be used without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. Additionally, it should be recognized that electrolyte 34 can be suitably delivered to polishing receptacle 100 through inlets 4 , 6 and 8 , without pump 34 . For example, electrolyte 34 can be maintained at pressure within electrolyte reservoir 36 . Alternatively, the supply lines between electrolyte reservoir 36 and inlets 4 , 6 and 8 can be maintained at pressure.
- LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 can include any convenient mass flow controller, preferably resistant to acid, corrosion, and contamination. Additionally, LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 deliver electrolyte 34 at set flow rates to sections 115 , 113 and 111 , respectively. Additionally, LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 can suitably deliver electrolyte 34 at flow rates proportionate to the volumes of sections 115 , 113 and 111 . For example, if section 115 is larger in volume than section 113 , then it can be advantageous for LMFC 21 to deliver electrolyte 34 at a greater flow rate than LMFC 22 . In the present exemplary embodiment, LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 are preferably configured to deliver electrolyte 34 at a flow rate between about 0.5 liters per minute and about 40 liters per minute.
- a separate LMFC delivers electrolyte into each section 115 , 113 and 111 .
- this configuration facilitates electropolishing of discrete portions of wafer 31 .
- electrolyte 34 can be delivered into polishing receptacle 100 from pump 33 without using LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 .
- wafer polisher 50 suitably includes cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 disposed within sections 111 , 113 and 115 , respectively.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 disposed within sections 111 , 113 and 115 , respectively.
- the present exemplary embodiment includes three cathodes, any number of cathodes, whether fewer or greater than three, can be used without deviating from the present invention.
- the more cathodes used the better film uniformity can be expected.
- the more cathodes used the greater the cost. Accordingly, considering the trade off between performance and cost, the preferred number of cathodes can be from about 7 to about 20 for electropolishing 200-millimeter wafers, and from about 10 to about 30 for electropolishing 300-millimeter wafers.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can include any convenient electrically conducting material, such as copper, lead, platinum, and the like. During the electroplating period, some of the metal ions, which migrate out of metal layer 121 , can accumulate on cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 . Accordingly, cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can be suitably replaced at any appropriate time. For example, cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can be suitably replaced after processing about 100 wafers.
- a deplating process for cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can be suitably performed.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 when cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 are charged positively and wafer 31 is charged negatively, then wafer 31 is suitably electroplated rather than electropolished. In this manner, wafer 31 can be suitably electroplated with the buildup of metal on cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 to suitably deplate cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 .
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 would function as anodes, for the sake of consistency and convenience, they will continue to be referred to as cathodes.
- metal layer 121 includes copper. Accordingly, as described above, during the electropolishing process, some of the copper ions from metal layer 121 migrate to electroplate cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 . In the deplating process described above, a wafer 31 can be suitably electroplated with the buildup of copper on cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 . However, when cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 are formed from copper, cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can dissolve during the deplating process. In this manner, cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can become deformed during the deplating process.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can be suitably formed from materials, which are resistant to being dissolved during the deplating process.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can be suitably formed from platinum.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 can be suitably formed from titanium suitably coated with a layer of platinum, preferably with a coating thickness of about 50 microns to about 400 microns.
- a wafer chuck 29 suitably holds and positions wafer 31 within polishing receptacle 100 . More particularly, wafer 31 is suitably positioned above the tops of section walls 101 , 103 , 105 , 107 and 109 to form a gap to facilitate the flow of electrolyte 34 between the bottom surface of wafer 31 and the tops of section walls 101 , 103 , 105 , 107 and 109 . In the present exemplary embodiment, wafer 31 is suitably positioned above the tops of section walls 101 , 103 , 105 , 107 and 109 to form a gap of about 2 millimeters to about 20 millimeters.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 are electrically connected to power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 , respectively. Additionally, wafer 31 is electrically connected to power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 .
- an electrical circuit is formed. More particularly, cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 are electrically charged to have negative electric potential in comparison to wafer 31 .
- metal ions migrate away from wafer 31 , thus electropolishing wafer 31 .
- the polarity of the circuit is reversed (i.e., cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 become anodes)
- metal ions migrate toward wafer 31 , thus electroplating wafer 31 .
- FIG. 33 depicts the selective electropolishing of wafer 31 in accordance with various aspects of the present invention.
- wafer area 280 has been electropolished
- area 284 is being electropolished
- wafer area 282 has not been polished.
- the polishing current density determines the rate at which metal ions migrate to or from wafer 31 . Accordingly, the higher the polishing current density, the greater the electropolishing or electroplating rate.
- power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 can apply different current densities to cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 .
- the current applied by power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 can be set proportional to the surface area of wafer 31 that is covered by the corresponding cathodes. Accordingly, if the surface area of wafer 31 covered by cathode 3 is larger than that covered cathode 2 , power supply 11 can be set to apply more current than power supply 12 . In this manner, the rate of electropolishing can be controlled to facilitate a more uniform etching of the surface of wafer 31 . It should be recognized that the same principle can also be used to facilitate a more uniform electroplating of the surface of wafer 31 .
- power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 can be operated in DC (i.e., direct current) mode.
- power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 can be operated in a variety of pulse modes.
- power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 can be operated using a bipolar pulse, a modified sine-wave, unipolar pulse, pulse reverse, pulse-on-pulse, duplex pulse, and the like.
- Power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 can also be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, and a combination of constant current mode and constant voltage mode.
- a drive mechanism 30 suitably rotates wafer 31 about the z-axis. In this manner, a more uniform electropolish can be achieved across the surface of wafer 31 .
- drive mechanism 30 rotates wafer 31 about the z-axis at approximately 10 revolutions per minute to approximately 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably at about 20 revolutions per minute.
- cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 are substantially circular in shape. Accordingly, with reference to FIG. 7B , the areas of wafer 31 above sections 112 and 114 are likely to be exposed to lower current density than the areas of wafer 31 above sections 111 , 113 and 115 (i.e., those sections containing a cathode).
- drive mechanism 30 suitably oscillates wafer 31 in the x and y directions. Alternatively or in addition to oscillating wafer 31 , as depicted in FIGS.
- polishing receptacle 100 can be formed into non-circular shapes, such as triangles, squares, rectangles, pentagons, polygons, ellipses, and the like. In this manner, the polishing current distribution can be averaged out across the surface of wafer 31 as wafer 31 is rotated about the z-axis.
- Electrolyte 34 returns to electrolyte reservoir 36 through outlets 5 , 7 and 9 , suitably formed in sections 112 , 114 and 116 , respectively.
- a pressure leak valve 38 is suitably placed between the outlet of pump 33 and electrolyte reservoir 36 to allow electrolyte 34 to leak back to electrolyte reservoir 36 when LMFCs 21 , 22 , and 23 are closed.
- a heater 42 , a temperature sensor 40 , and a heater controller 44 suitably control the temperature of electrolyte 34 in electrolyte reservoir 36 .
- wafer polisher 50 and electrolyte 34 are preferably operated at an operating temperature of about 15 degrees Celsius to about 60 degrees Celsius, and preferably at about 45 degrees Celsius.
- wafer 31 is suitably electropolished for a period of time (i.e., an electropolishing time period), until metal layer 121 is removed from barrier layer 122 , while metal layer 121 remains within trenches 125 (as depicted in FIG. 1B ).
- an electropolishing time period can be determined by measuring the output voltage and current of power supplies 11 , 12 and 13 . More particularly, the resistance of barrier layer 122 is typically significantly greater than metal layer 121 .
- barrier layer 122 includes titanium, titanium-nitride, tantalum, tantalum-nitride, tungsten, or tungsten-nitride and metal layer 121 includes copper
- the resistance of barrier layer 122 is typically about 50 to about 100 times greater than the resistance of metal layer 121 . Accordingly, the potential measured from edge to center of wafer 31 after polishing metal layer 121 away from the non-trench portions of wafer 31 is larger than that before polishing.
- the portions of metal layer 121 above wafer 31 which have been removed can be suitably determined: TABLE 1 1.
- V 11 Voltage of power supply 11
- V 12 Voltage of power supply 12
- V 13 Voltage of power supply 13
- metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 1 has been removed; 2.
- V 11 is small in value
- V 12 and V 13 are large in value
- metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 3 has not been removed.
- metal layer 121 above cathode 2 has been removed.
- the condition of metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 1 is unknown. Therefore, the following additional conditions can be consulted to determine the condition of metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 1: a.
- metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 1 has not been removed; or b. If V 12 and V 13 are apart each other in value, then metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 1 has been removed; 3. If V 11 , V 12 and V 13 are large in value, then metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 3 has been removed. However, the condition of metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathodes 2 and 1 is unknown. Therefore, the following additional conditions can be consulted to determine the condition of metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathodes 2 and 1: a.
- V 11 , V 12 , V 13 are apart from each other in value, then metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 2 and cathode 1 have been removed; b. If V 11 and V 12 are apart each other in value, and V 12 and V 13 are close each other in value, then metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 2 has been removed. Additionally, metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 1 has not been removed; c. If V 11 and V 12 are close each other in value, and V 12 and V 13 are apart each other in value, then metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode has not been removed. Additionally, metal layer 121 on wafer 31 above cathode 1 has been removed; or d.
- V 11 , V 12 and V 13 were described as being large and/or small. It should be recognized, however, that the terms large and small are relative and not meant to relate to any particular voltages. For example, when V 11 and V 12 are described above as being small, V 11 and V 12 are small in comparison to V 13 . As alluded to above, V 11 and V 12 could be as much as about 50 to about 100 times smaller than V 13 .
- monitors can be suitably configured to measure the voltage and current provided by each one of power supplies 11 , 12 and 13 .
- This data can be suitably transmitted to a control system, which can include the above logic table in electronic format.
- the above table can be encoded and stored in an appropriate electronic storage medium, such as on magnetic tape, magnetic disk, compact disk, and the like, or in an appropriate electronic device, such as on an integrated circuit, memory chip, and the like.
- the control system can then execute appropriate commands to continue or to stop the electropolishing of a particular portion of wafer 31 .
- the control system described above can be integrated into an appropriate computer system, which can be a component of a wafer electropolishing tool, an example of which is described below.
- power supplies 13 , 12 and 11 can be operated in DC mode or in a variety of pulse modes. Additionally, they can be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these two modes.
- FIG. 55 a graph is shown depicting the relationship between current and voltage during electropolishing using a pulsed power supply.
- FIG. 56 a graph is shown depicting the relationship between current and voltage during electropolishing using a DC power supply.
- FIGS. 55 and 56 three regions are depicted. These regions are characterized by different electropolishing rates (the rate at which the metal layer is removed) and different wafer surface profiles.
- the electropolishing rate is slower than the other two regions. In this region, a rough surface can result on the wafer, similar to the results obtained from a chemical etching process.
- the electropolishing rate is faster than the other two regions. In this region, a rough surface can result on the wafer.
- the electropolishing rate is faster than the etching region but slower than the over-voltage polishing region. In this region, a fine surface can result on the wafer.
- the voltage and current of the power supply can be varied to control the electropolishing process.
- the power supply can be maintained in the over-voltage polishing region to remove a greater amount of the metal layer.
- the power supply can be maintained in the polishing region to obtain a smoother surface on the wafer.
- the power supply can then be maintained in the etching region to slow the rate of electropolishing.
- the current and voltage can be monitored to determine when to stop electropolishing (i.e., determining the end point). This end-point determination can be performed in all three regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 . But performing end-point detection in the etching region has the advantage that a small amount of the metal layer is removed in this region.
- V polishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56
- V monitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I).
- R 01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is reduced from V polishing to V monitor .
- R 02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is increased from V monitor to V polishing .
- the applied voltage can be switched between V monitor and V polishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed (i.e., recess 127 depicted in FIG. 1B is reduced or eliminated) surface on the wafer.
- V polishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer.
- the electropolishing resistance R is monitored.
- the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed. As described above, the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer.
- the electropolishing resistance R rises above the preset resistance R 01 , then the applied voltage V is reduced to V monitor .
- V monitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer.
- patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions.
- electropolishing resistance R falls below R 02 , then the applied voltage V is increased to V polishing .
- the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- I polishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- I monitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I).
- R 01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is reduced from I polishing to I monitor .
- R 02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is increased from I monitor to I polishing .
- the applied current can be switched between I monitor and I polishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- I polishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer.
- the electropolishing resistance R is monitored.
- the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed.
- the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R.
- the applied current I is reduced to I monitor .
- I monitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer.
- patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions.
- the applied current I is increased to I polishing .
- the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- V polishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56
- V monitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R 01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is reduced from V polishing to V monitor .
- R 02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is increased from V monitor to V polishing .
- the applied voltage can be switched between V monitor and V polishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- V polishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer.
- the electropolishing resistance R is monitored.
- the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed.
- the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R.
- the applied voltage V is reduced to V monitor .
- V monitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer.
- patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions.
- electropolishing resistance R falls below R 02 , then the applied voltage V is increased to V polishing .
- the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- I polishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- I monitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R 01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is reduced from I polishing to I monitor .
- R 02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is increased from I monitor to I polishing .
- the applied current can be switched between I monitor and I polishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- I polishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer.
- the electropolishing resistance R is monitored.
- the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed.
- the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R.
- the applied current I is reduced to I monitor .
- I monitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer.
- patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions.
- the applied current I is increased to I polishing .
- the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- D polishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process.
- D polishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent.
- D monitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection.
- D monitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent.
- the frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz.
- the value of R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R 01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is reduced from D polishing to D monitor .
- R 02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is increased from D monitor to D polishing .
- the applied duty cycle D can be switched between D monitor and D polishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- D polishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer.
- the electropolishing resistance R is monitored.
- the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed.
- the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R.
- the applied duty cycle D is reduced to D monitor .
- D monitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer.
- patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions.
- the applied duty cycle D is increased to D polishing .
- the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- D polishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process.
- D polishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent.
- D monitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection.
- D monitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent.
- the frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz.
- the value of R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R 01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is reduced from D polishing to D monitor .
- R 02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is increased from D monitor to D polishing .
- the applied duty cycle D can be switched between D monitor and D polishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- D polishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer.
- the electropolishing resistance R is monitored.
- the electropolishing resistance R increases.
- the applied duty cycle D is reduced to D monitor .
- D monitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer.
- the electropolishing resistance R By continuing to monitor the electropolishing resistance R, patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions. If electropolishing resistance R falls below R 02 , then the applied duty cycle D is increased to D polishing . By adjusting R 01 and R 02 , the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- the electropolishing voltage, current, or duty cycle have been described as being varied between two discrete levels (i.e., a polishing and a monitoring level). It should be recognized, however, that the electropolishing voltage, current, or duty cycle can be varied adaptively within a continuum.
- V polishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- V monitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I).
- R max is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1B .
- R min is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1A .
- N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like.
- the applied voltage V approaches V monitor .
- the applied voltage V approaches V polishing .
- the applied voltage V is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- I polishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- I monitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I).
- R max is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1B .
- R min is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1A .
- N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like.
- the applied current I approaches I monitor .
- the applied current I approaches I polishing .
- the applied current I is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- V polishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- V monitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R max is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1B .
- R min is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1A .
- N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like.
- the applied voltage V approaches V monitor .
- the applied voltage V approaches V polishing .
- the applied voltage V is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- I polishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- I monitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted in FIGS. 55 and 56 .
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R max is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1B .
- R min is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1A .
- N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like.
- the applied current I approaches I monitor .
- the applied current I approaches I polishing .
- the applied current I is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- the applied duty cycle D can be controlled using the following formula: D polishing - ⁇ R - R min R max - R min ⁇ N ⁇ ( D polishng - D monitor )
- D polishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process.
- D polishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent.
- D monitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection.
- D monitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent.
- the frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz.
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R max is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1B .
- R min is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1A .
- N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like.
- the applied duty cycle D approaches D monitor .
- the applied duty cycle D approaches D polishing .
- the applied duty cycle D is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- the applied duty cycle D can be controlled using the following formula: D polishing - ⁇ R - R min R max - R min ⁇ N ⁇ ( D polishng - D monitor )
- D polishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process.
- D polishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent.
- D monitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection.
- D monitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent.
- the frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz.
- R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection.
- the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high.
- R max is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1B .
- R min is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1A .
- N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like.
- the applied duty cycle D approaches D monitor .
- the applied duty cycle D approaches D polishing .
- the applied duty cycle D is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- V polishing can be in the range of about 0.5 volts to about 3 volts.
- V monitor can be in the range of about 0.1 volts to about 0.5 volts.
- I polishing can be in the range of about 5 mA/cm 2 to about 50 mA/cm 2 .
- I monitor can be in the range of about 0.01 mA/cm 2 to about 5 mA/cm 2 .
- the peak-to-peak voltage can be about 1 volt and the peak-to-peak current density can be about 30 mA/cm 2 . It should be recognized, however, that these values are only exemplary and that they can vary depending on the particular application.
- R ML is the resistance of the metal film from the edge of the wafer in contact with the electrode (i.e., the electrode that provides the electrical charge to the wafer) to the area of the wafer in contact with the electrolyte.
- R barrier is the resistance of the barrier layer from the edge of the wafer in contact with the electrode to the area of the wafer in contact with the electrolyte.
- R contact is the resistance where the wafer contacts the electrode.
- R cathode is the resistance between the cathode and the electrolyte.
- FIG. 57 a graph is shown depicting changes in electropolishing resistance, R over time.
- the electropolishing process begins at about point A when the metal layer begins to be removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1A .
- the metal layer as be removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted in FIG. 1B .
- the electropolishing process is performed between endpoints A and B.
- the amount and profile of the metal layer remaining on the wafer surface being determined by where along the curve between these two endpoints the electropolishing process is stopped. It should be recognized, however, that the shape of the graph depicted in FIG. 57 can vary depending on the particular application.
- equation (2) would represent tangent lines along the curve depicted in FIG. 8 . But as can be seen in FIG. 57 , an inflection point exists at point B. Thus, based solely on equation (2), a point lying between points A and B can not be distinguished from a point lying between points B and C.
- equation (1) can be taken to distinguish between points lying between points A and B from points lying between points B and C. In this manner, the amount and profile of the metal layer remaining on the wafer surface can be determined by stopping the electropolishing process at the desired endpoint along the curve depicted in FIG. 57 .
- C 0 is a predetermined constant at which the electropolishing process is to be stopped.
- the electropolishing process can be stopped entirely (for example, by turning off the power supply). Alternatively, as described above, the electropolishing rate can be reduced to continue to monitor the electropolishing resistance R. If the electropolishing resistance R sufficiently decreases (for example, as in unpolished patches or areas of the wafer), then the electropolishing rate can be increased.
- C 0 , C maximum , and C 1 can be determined experimentally. For example, wafers can be processed at various C 0 settings to determine the value that produces the desired wafer surface profile. Once this value is determined, they can be used to process additional wafers.
- C 0 can range between about 0.01 ohms/second to about 100 ohms/second.
- C maximum can range between about 10 ohms/second to about 100 ohms/second.
- C 1 can range between about 0.01 ohm/second to about 100 ohms/second. It should be recognized, however, that these values can vary depending on the particular application.
- power supply 200 can be operated in DC mode or in a variety of pulse modes. Additionally, it can be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Further, when a pulsed power supply is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied.
- U is the applied voltage
- I is the applied current.
- U is the applied voltage
- I is the applied current.
- the electropolishing process is stopped.
- the electropolishing process can be stopped entirely (for example, by turning off the power supply).
- the electropolishing rate can be reduced to continue to monitor the electropolishing resistance R. If the electropolishing resistance R sufficiently decreases (for example, as in unpolished patches or areas of the wafer), then the electropolishing rate can be increased. Additionally, when a pulsed power supply is used, the duty cycle can be altered to alter the electropolishing rate.
- the electropolishing resistance R was described as increasing when the metal layer is removed to expose the barrier layer.
- the barrier layer can be omitted from the wafer.
- the dielectric layer is exposed when the metal layer is removed. Dielectric layers typically have a greater electrical resistance characteristic than the metal layer. Accordingly, the electropolishing resistance R will increase when the metal layer is removed to expose the dielectric layer.
- sensors can be used to measure the thickness of metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) on wafer 31 ( FIG. 1A and FIG. 7B ).
- an end-point detector system can be suitably employed to determine the appropriate electropolishing time period.
- the measured electrical resistance from edge to edge of wafer 31 ( FIG. 1A ) is monitored using appropriate measurement tools.
- the appropriate time at which to stop electropolishing is preferably around the time at which the measured electrical resistance from edge to edge of wafer 31 changes rapidly.
- the region beyond t 1 is called the over-polishing region, meaning that wafer 31 ( FIG. 1B ) has been polished such that the level of metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1B ) within trench 125 ( FIG. 1B ) extends below the level of barrier layer 122 ( FIG. 1B ).
- the region before t 0 is called the under-polishing region, meaning that metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) has not been entirely removed from dielectric layer 122 ( FIG. 1A ) on gates 126 ( FIG. 1A ).
- the resistance signal can be sent to a computer, which can then send the appropriate signal to stop the polishing process.
- cathode 3 then cathode 2 , and then cathode 1 ;
- cathode 3 cathode 1 , and then cathode 2 ;
- metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) can be electropolished more uniformly from wafer 31 , even when wafer 31 is a large diameter wafer.
- the present invention can be used with a wafer 31 having a diameter of 300 millimeters or greater.
- a uniform electropolish refers to electropolishing wafer 31 such that metal layer 121 is removed to an approximately even thickness across substantially all of the surface area of wafer 31 .
- the greater the diameter of wafer 31 the greater the nonuniformity of the electropolish.
- the areas of wafer 31 near the center can be overpolished while the areas of wafer 31 near the edges of wafer 31 can be underpolished. This can be due in part to the varying charge densities applied across wafer 31 by conventional electropolishing systems.
- recesses 127 can form over trenches 125 .
- recesses 127 can remain in the metal layer 121 formed within trenches 125 . This can be due in part to the original uneven topology of metal layer 121 depicted in FIG. 1A .
- overpolishing can contribute to the formation of recesses 127 within trenches 125 .
- the existence of recesses 127 can adversely affect the performance of the semiconductor device. Accordingly, recesses 127 having a recess depth 128 greater than about 500 Angstroms are typically considered undesirable.
- the amount of recess depth 128 can vary depending on the particular application. For example, for a high precision semiconductor device, a recess depth 128 of no more than a few Angstroms can be acceptable. However, for a low cost semiconductor device, a recess depth 128 greater than 500 Angstroms can be acceptable.
- the electropolishing time period can be suitably controlled to prevent the formation of recesses 127 with recess depth 128 of greater than about 500 Angstroms.
- an electropolishing and electroplating process can be suitably combined with a chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process to remove recesses 127 .
- CMP processes can suitably produce a planar surface on wafer 31 with recesses 127 having a recess depth 128 between about 100 and about 500 Angstroms.
- metal layer 121 is suitably electropolished from barrier layer 122 formed on mesas 126 .
- wafer 31 then undergoes a replating process to replate a sufficient amount of metal to fix recesses 127 ( FIG. 1B ), meaning that metal is plated onto metal layer 121 , which is formed in trenches 125 ( FIG. 1B ), without replating over barrier layer 122 on mesas 126 .
- wafer 31 can be suitably replated by reversing the polarity of power supplies 11 , 12 and 13 . In this manner, as also described in greater detail below, wafer 31 can be suitably replated without necessarily having to transfer wafer 31 to another station.
- the metal layer 123 within trenches 125 which has been replated, is suitably planarized, and the barrier layer 122 is suitably removed.
- wafer 31 is preferably planarized using a CMP process.
- wafer processing tool 301 preferably includes electroplating/electropolishing cells 300 , 302 , 304 , 306 and 308 , cleaning cells 310 , 312 , 314 , 316 and 318 , a CMP cell 324 , wafer cassette 320 , and a robot 322 .
- Robot 322 begins by transferring a wafer from wafer cassette 320 to any one of electroplating/electropolishing cells 300 , 302 , 304 , 306 , or 308 .
- the wafer is suitably electroplated with a metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ).
- the wafer is suitably electropolished to remove metal layer 121 from barrier layer 122 ( FIG. 1B ).
- the wafer is suitably replated to fix recesses 127 ( FIGS. 1B and 1C ).
- Robot 322 then transfers the wafer to any one of cleaning cells 310 , 312 , 314 , 316 , or 318 .
- robot 322 transfers the wafer to CMP cell 324 , where the metal layer 121 is planarized and barrier layer 122 is removed ( FIG. 1D ). Robot 322 then transfers the wafer to any one of cleaning cells 300 , 302 , 304 , 306 , or 308 for the wafer to be cleaned and dried. Finally, robot 322 transfers the wafer to wafer cassette 320 and begins again with another wafer.
- the initial electroplating and electropolishing of the wafer can be performed in separate cells.
- different electrolytes are used for electroplating and electropolishing.
- a sulfuric acid is typically used.
- a phosphoric acid is typically used.
- sulfuric acid can be used for electropolishing, the resulting surface can be non-uniform.
- phosphoric acid can be used for electroplating, the resulting surface can be non-uniform.
- a non-uniform surface can be acceptable for the replating process described above.
- the electroplating and electropolishing of the wafer can be performed in separate cells with different chemistries.
- the chemistry of the electrolyte solution within the cell can be varied. For example, for the replating process described above, a sulfuric acid solution can be added to facilitate a better electroplating process.
- the processing steps performed by wafer processing tool 301 are set forth in a flow chart format. It should be recognized, however, that various modifications can be made to the steps depicted in the flow chart in FIG. 2 .
- the wafers may be queued after the re-plating step, then rinsed and cleaned in a batch process.
- wafer-processing tool 301 can be modified to include an etching cell 326 .
- the processing steps performed by wafer processing tool 301 can be modified to include an etching step.
- FIGS. 1A and 1B an alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 11A and 11B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B except that LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 ( FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced by LMFC 55 and valves 51 , 52 and 53 .
- valves 51 , 52 and 53 are preferably on/off valves.
- F.R. 3 is the set point of flow rate to inlet 4
- F.R. 2 is the set point of flow rate to inlet 6
- F.R. 3 is the set point of flow rate to inlet 8
- the flow rates can be set proportionate to the volumes of section 15 , 113 and 111 .
- FIGS. 12A and 12B another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 12A and 12B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B except that LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 ( FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced by three pumps 33 and on/off valves 51 , 52 and 53 .
- the delivery of electrolyte 34 into polishing receptacle 100 through inlets 4 , 6 and 8 can be preferably controlled independently by each one of three pumps 33 and one on/off valve 51 , 52 , or 53 .
- a cathode is preferably disposed in every section of polishing receptacle 100 except section 132 .
- additional cathode 154 is suitably disposed between section walls 103 and 105 .
- on/off valves 81 , 82 , 83 and 84 are suitably disposed between the electrolyte reservoir 36 and the outlets of LMFCs 21 , 22 , 23 and 24 . Accordingly, when an on/off valve 81 , 82 , 83 or 84 is in an open position, electrolyte 34 can suitably flow back into electrolyte reservoir 36 through the open valve from polishing receptacle 100 .
- polishing rather than polishing from periphery of the wafer to center of the wafer, polishing also can be performed from center to periphery, or can be performed by randomly choosing a cathode sequence.
- FIGS. 14A and 14B yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 14A and 14B is similar to that of FIGS. 13A and 13B except that on/off valves 81 , 82 , 83 and 84 ( FIGS. 13A and 13B ) have been removed. Accordingly, electrolyte 34 returns to electrolyte reservoir 36 only through section 130 .
- the polishing instead of polishing from the center of wafer 31 to the periphery of wafer 31 , the polishing also can be performed from the periphery to the center, or can be performed randomly depending on the cathode sequence.
- FIG. 15 another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 15 is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B except that a diffuser ring 112 has been added above each cathode.
- diffuser ring 112 preferably facilitates a more uniform flow of electrolyte 34 along section walls 109 , 107 , 105 and 103 .
- metal layer 121 FIG. 1A
- diffuser ring 112 can be suitably formed using any convenient method.
- diffuser ring 112 can be machined to have a number of holes.
- diffuser ring 112 can include any suitable porous material having porosity preferably in the range of about 10% to about 90%.
- diffuser ring 112 is preferably formed from anti-acid, anti-corrosion, particle and contamination free materials.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 16A and 16B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B except that charge accumulator meters 141 , 142 and 143 have been added to power supplies 11 , 12 and 13 , respectively.
- charge accumulator meters 141 , 142 and 143 preferably measure the charge each power supply 11 , 12 and 13 provides during the electropolishing process.
- the total number of atoms of copper removed can be calculated by dividing the accumulated charge by two.
- the total number of atoms of copper removed can then be used to determine how much copper remains to be electropolished.
- FIGS. 17A and 17B yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 17A and 17B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B except that polishing receptacle 100 suitably includes a plurality of inlets 171 , 172 , 174 and 175 suitably disposed in sections 113 and 115 for delivery of electrolyte 34 .
- electrolyte 34 is preferably delivered into section 113 through feed line 170 and inlets 171 and 172 .
- Electrolyte 34 is preferably delivered into section 115 through electrolyte feed line 173 and inlets 174 and 175 .
- sections 113 and 115 can include any number of additional inlets.
- FIGS. 18A and 18B two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 18A is similar to that of FIGS. 13A and 13B and FIGS. 14A and 14B except that the height of section walls 109 , 107 , 105 and 103 increases outward along the radial direction.
- the height of section walls 109 , 107 , 105 and 103 decreases outward along the radial direction. In this manner, the flow pattern of electrolyte 34 can be further controlled to enhance the electropolishing process.
- FIGS. 19A and 19B two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 19A is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B except that the height of section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 increases outward along the radial direction.
- the height of section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 decreases outward along the radial direction. In this manner, the flow pattern of electrolyte 34 can be further controlled to enhance the electropolishing process.
- FIGS. 20A and 20B yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 20A and 20B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B , except that section walls 109 , 107 105 , 103 and 101 are configured to move up and down to adjust the flow pattern of electrolyte 34 .
- section walls 105 and 107 can move up, such that electrolyte 34 flows toward the portion of wafer 31 above section walls 105 and 107 .
- FIGS. 21A and 21B two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 21A is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B , except that, in the present alternative embodiment, cathodes 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 and section walls 109 , 107 , 105 and 103 are divided into six sections.
- the embodiment of FIG. 21B is similar to FIGS. 13A and 13B , except that, in the present alternative embodiment, cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 and section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 are divided into six sections. It should be recognized, however, that with regard to both embodiments in FIGS. 21A and 21B , any number of sections can be used without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- the cathodes can be connected to one or more power supplies and the sections can be connected to one or more LMFCs in various combinations: TABLE 2 Various ways to connect Various ways to connect Combination the cathodes to one or one or more sectors to No.
- Each cathode is connected Each sector is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 2 Each cathode is connected Sectors on the same to an independent power radius are connected supply to an independent LMFC 3 Each cathode is connected All sectors are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 4 Cathodes on the same Each sector is connected radius are connected to to an independent LMFC an independent power supply 5 Cathodes on the same Sectors on the same radius are connected radius are connected to an independent to an independent power supply LMFC 6 Cathodes on the same radius All sectors are connected are connected to an to an independent LMFC independent power supply 7 All cathodes are connected Each sector is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 8 All cathodes are connected Sectors on the same to an independent power radius are connected supply to an independent LMFC 9 All cathodes are connected All sectors are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply
- combination numbers 1 , 2 , 4 and 5 are the same as described earlier in conjunction with various alternative embodiments.
- the operation of combination numbers 3 , 6 , 7 , 8 and 9 will be described in greater detail below in conjunction with various other alternative embodiments.
- FIGS. 22A and 22B still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 22A and 22B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B , except that cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 ( FIGS. 7A and 7B ) and section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 ( FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced by a plurality of rod-type cathodes 501 suitably disposed within a plurality of tubes 503 .
- electrolyte 34 FIG.
- cathodes 503 , plurality of tubes 503 , and plurality of drainage holes 500 are preferably arranged in a circular pattern.
- cathodes 501 , plurality of tubes 503 , and plurality of drainage holes 500 can also be configured in various other patterns, such as a triangle ( FIG. 23A ), a square ( FIG. 23B ), an ellipse ( FIG. 23C ), and the like.
- cathodes 501 and plurality of tubes 503 can be connected to power supplies 11 , 12 and 13 ( FIG. 7B ) and LMFCs 21 , 22 and 23 ( FIG. 7B ), respectively, in various combinations: TABLE 3 Various ways to connect Various ways to connect Combination cathodes 501 to one or plurality of tubes 503 No.
- Each cathode is connected Each tube is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 2 Each cathode is connected Tubes on the same radius to an independent power are connected to an supply independent LMFC 3 Each cathode is connected All tubes are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 4 Cathodes on the same Each tube is connected radius are connected to to an independent LMFC an independent power supply 5 Cathodes on the same radius Tubes on the same radius are connected to an are connected to an independent power supply independent LMFC 6 Cathodes on the same radius All tubes are connected are connected to an to an independent LMFC independent power supply 7 All cathodes are connected Each tube is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 8 All cathodes are connected Tubes on the same radius to an independent power are connected to an supply independent LMFC 9 All cathodes are connected All tubes are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply
- combination numbers 1 , 2 , 4 and 5 are the same as described earlier in conjunction with various alternative embodiments.
- the operation of combination numbers 3 , 6 , 7 , 8 and 9 will be described in greater detail below in conjunction with various other alternative embodiments.
- FIGS. 24A and 24B another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 24A and 24B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B , except that cathodes 1 , 2 and 3 ( FIGS. 7A and 7B ) and section walls 109 , 107 , 105 , 103 and 101 ( FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced with cathode 240 , bar 242 , and valves 202 , 204 , 206 , 208 , 210 , 212 , 214 , 216 and 218 .
- the number of power supplies has been reduced to power supply 200 .
- valves 202 , 204 , 206 , 208 , 210 , 212 , 214 , 216 and 218 are preferably on/off valves used to control the flow of electrolyte 34 onto wafer 31 . Furthermore, valves 202 , 204 , 206 , 208 , 210 , 212 , 214 , 216 and 218 are disposed symmetrically on bar 242 to facilitate a more uniform electropolishing process.
- power supply 200 can be operated in DC mode, or in a variety of pulse modes, as shown in FIG. 8 . Also, the power supply can be turned on after turning on pump 33 and valves 202 and 216 , or 204 and 214 , or 206 and 212 , or 210 .
- FIG. 25 still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 25 is similar to that of FIGS. 24A and 24B , except that all valves are disposed on bar 242 at different radii on bar 242 to facilitate a more uniform electropolish.
- power supply 200 ( FIG. 24B ) can be operated in DC mode, or in a variety of pulse modes, as shown in FIG. 8 . Additionally, the electroplating sequence can be started from the center of wafer 31 to the edge of wafer 31 without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- FIG. 26 yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 26 is similar to that of FIG. 25 except that an additional bar has been added to form a cross-shaped bar 244 .
- Valves 202 and 218 , 204 and 216 , 206 and 214 , 208 and 212 are placed symmetrically on the horizontal portion of bar 244 (as depicted in FIG. 26 ).
- valves 220 and 236 , 222 and 234 , 224 and 232 are placed symmetrically on vertical portion of bar 244 (as depicted in FIG. 26 ).
- the valves on horizontal portion of bar 244 are disposed at different radii than the valves on the vertical portion of bar 244 .
- power supply 200 ( FIG. 24B ) can be operated in DC mode, or in a variety of pulse modes, as shown in FIG. 8 .
- FIGS. 27A , B, and C three additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 27A is similar to that of FIGS. 24A and 24B except that, in the present alternative embodiment, three bars are used.
- the angle between two adjacent bars is preferably about 60°.
- the embodiment of FIG. 27B is similar to those of FIGS. 24A and 24B except that four bars are used.
- the angle between two adjacent bars is preferably about 45°.
- FIG. 27C is similar to those of FIGS. 24A and 24B except that half of a bar is used. It should be recognized, however, that any number of bars can be used without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. Additionally, the adjacent bars can be set at various angles again without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- the electropolishing sequence can be started from valves close to the periphery of wafer 31 , or started from the center of wafer 31 , or started randomly. Starting from the center of wafer 31 is preferred since the non-polished metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) (with larger diameter) can be used to conduct current for polishing the next portion of metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) (with smaller diameter).
- FIGS. 28A and 28B still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 28A and 28B is similar to that of FIGS. 24A and 24B except that position fixed valves 202 , 204 , 206 , 208 , 210 , 212 , 214 , 216 and 218 have been replaced by two moveable jets 254 .
- Moveable jets 254 are disposed adjacent wafer 31 and apply electrolyte 34 onto specific portions of wafer 34 .
- Moveable jets 254 also sit on guide bar 250 , and can move along the X direction as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B . Additionally, in the present exemplary embodiment, fresh electrolyte is supplied through flexible pipe 258 .
- FIGS. 29A and 29B yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 29A and 29B is similar to that of FIGS. 28A and 28B except that two additional moveable cathode jets are added in the Y direction in order to increasing polishing speed.
- the process sequence is similar to that of FIGS. 28A and 28B .
- FIGS. 30A and 30B another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 30A and 30B is similar to that of FIGS. 28A and 28B except that wafer 31 is immersed into electrolyte 34 .
- Moveable jets 254 are disposed adjacent to wafer 31 to focus polishing current on a specific portion of wafer 31 .
- the gap between moveable jet 254 and wafer 31 can be in the range of about 0.1 millimeters to about 5 millimeters, and preferably about 1 millimeter.
- the process sequence is similar to that of FIGS. 28A and 28B .
- FIGS. 31A and 31B still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 31A and 31B is similar to that of FIGS. 30A and 30B except that fresh electrolyte 34 can be delivered through pipe 260 instead of moveable jets 252 and 254 through flexible pipe 258 .
- Wafer 31 also can be immersed in electrolyte 34 , and moveable jets 252 and 254 can be disposed adjacent to wafer 31 to focus polishing current on a specific portion of wafer 31 .
- the gap between moveable jets 252 and 254 and wafer 31 can be in the range of about 0.1 millimeters to about 5 millimeters, and preferably about 1 millimeter. Again the process sequence is similar to that of FIGS. 28A and 28B .
- FIG. 32A shows a moveable jet, which preferably includes cathode 252 and case 262 .
- Case 262 can be suitably formed from an insulator material, such as Teflon, CPVC, PVDF, Polypropylene, and the like.
- FIG. 32B shows a moveable jet consisting of cathode 266 and case 264 .
- Electrolyte 34 can be delivered through a hole suitably formed at the bottom of case 264 .
- FIG. 32A shows a moveable jet, which preferably includes cathode 252 and case 262 .
- Case 262 can be suitably formed from an insulator material, such as Teflon, CPVC, PVDF, Polypropylene, and the like.
- FIG. 32B shows a moveable jet consisting of cathode 266 and case 264 .
- Electrolyte 34 can be delivered through a hole suitably formed at the bottom of case 264 .
- 32C shows a moveable jet, which preferably includes cathode 262 , electrodes 274 and 270 , insulator spacer 272 , case 262 , and power supplies 276 and 268 .
- Electrode 274 can be suitably connected to the negative output of power supply 276
- electrode 270 can be connected to wafer 31 .
- electrode 276 preferably traps metal ions flowing out of case 262 , therefore reducing film buildup in the area outside of case 262 .
- electrode 270 preferably prevents electrical field leakage from electrode 276 to minimize etch effect.
- FIG. 32D is similar to that of Fig.32C , except that case 264 has a hole at the bottom for electrolyte 34 .
- FIG. 34A, 34B , 34 C and 34 D four additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.
- the embodiment of FIG. 34A is similar to those of FIGS. 28A and 28B except that three bars are preferably used.
- the angle between two adjacent bars can be preferably about 60°.
- the embodiment of FIG. 34B is similar to those of FIGS. 28A and 28B except that four bars are preferably used.
- the angle between two adjacent bars can be preferably about 45°.
- the embodiment of FIG. 34 C is similar to those of FIGS. 28A and 28B except that half of a bar is used.
- any number of bars can be employed without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- any two adjacent bars can be separated by any desired angle without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- the embodiment of FIG. 34D is similar to those of FIGS. 28A and 28B except that the straight bar is replaced by a spiral bar.
- FIG. 35 two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.
- the embodiments of FIGS. 35A and 35B are similar to those of FIGS. 28A and 28B except wafer 31 can be positioned upside down and vertically, respectively.
- FIGS. 36A and 36B another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 36A and 36B is similar to that of FIGS. 14A and 14B except that all cathodes are replaced by a one-piece cathode 8 .
- cathode 8 can be suitably connected to single power supply 11 .
- FIGS. 38A and 38B still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 38A and 38B is similar to that of FIGS. 7A and 7B except that all cathodes are connected to single power supply 11 . Since the electrolyte only contacts the portion of wafer 31 being selectively electropolished, a majority of the polishing current will come from the cathode and go to that portion of wafer 31 .
- the polishing process steps are similar to those of FIGS. 7A and 7B , with power supply replacing power supplies 12 and 13 .
- FIGS. 39A and 39B yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 39A and 39B is similar to that of FIGS. 38A and 38B except that section 101 , 103 , 105 , 107 and 109 can move up and down to adjust the flow pattern.
- section walls 105 and 107 are moved up, so that the electrolyte flows toward the portion of wafer 31 above section walls 105 and 107 .
- FIGS. 40A and 40B illustrate an embodiment with multiple power supplies and a single LMFC for polishing metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) directly on a substrate with a barrier layer on top.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 40A and 40B is similar to that of FIGS. 14A and 14B except that LMFCs 21 , 22 , 23 and 24 are replaced by a single LMFC 55 .
- FIG. 41 shows the power supply turn on/off sequence for polishing wafer areas 4 (above cathode 4 ), 3 , 2 , and then 1 .
- the power supply output wave form can be selected from a variety of wave forms such as a modified sine-wave form, a unipolar pulse, a pulse reverse, a pulse-on-pulse, or a duplex pulse, as shown in FIG. 42 .
- electropolishing instead of electropolishing from the periphery to the center of the wafer, electropolishing can also be performed from center to periphery, or can be performed randomly by choosing an arbitrary cathode sequence.
- FIGS. 43A and 43B show an embodiment of the apparatus with multiple power supplies and a single LMFC for polishing metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) directly on substrate 123 ( FIG. 1A ) with barrier layer 122 ( FIG. 1A ) on top.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 43A and 43B is similar to that of FIGS. 40A and 40B except that section walls can move up and down to adjust the flow pattern. As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B , section walls 105 and 107 can be moved up, so that the electrolyte flows toward the portion of wafer 31 above walls 105 and 107 .
- FIGS. 44A and 44B show an embodiment of the apparatus with a single power supply and single LMFC for polishing metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) directly on substrate 123 ( FIG. 1A ) with barrier layer 122 ( FIG. 1A ) on top.
- the embodiment of FIGS. 44A and 44B is similar to that of FIGS. 43A and 43B except that one power supply is used, and all cathodes are connected to single power supply 11 .
- section walls can move up and down to adjust the flow pattern. As shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B , section walls 105 and 107 can be moved up, so that the electrolyte flows toward the portion of wafer above wall 105 and 107 .
- FIGS. 45 and 46 show embodiments configured with an in-situ film thickness uniformity monitor.
- Sensors 500 can be ultrasonic type thickness measurement sensors. Signal detected from sensors 500 is sent back to computer 502 . The in-situ thickness data can be used to adjust or control polishing uniformity and final thickness.
- one embodiment of the present invention includes a drive mechanism 1000 , a chuck 1002 , a wafer 1004 , an injection nozzle 1008 , and an end-point detector 1006 .
- drive mechanism 1000 can be configured to rotate wafer 1004 (indicated in FIG. 58 as about the z-axis).
- Drive mechanism 1000 can also be configured to move wafer 1000 horizontally relative to nozzle 1008 (indicated in FIG. 58 as the x-direction). As alluded to earlier with regard to another embodiment, this movement of the wafer during electropolishing can enhance the uniformity of the electropolished wafer surface.
- end-point detector 1006 is configured to detect the thickness of the metal layer on wafer 1004 .
- end-point detector 1006 can include various sensors, such as ultrasonic sensors.
- end-point detector 1006 is configured as an optical reflection sensor. Accordingly, as the metal layer is electropolished, end-point detector 1006 responds to the changing reflectivity of the wafer surface.
- FIG. 59 for illustrative purpose, a graph depicting the changes in the reflectivity of a wafer surface is shown. It should be recognized, however, that the shape of the curve depicted in FIG. 59 can vary depending on the particular application.
- the portion of the line before point A corresponds to the portion of the electropolishing process when the metal layer on the wafer surface is being removed.
- the reflectivity of the wafer surface does not change significantly during this portion of the electropolishing process because the wafer surface remains covered by the metal layer.
- point A corresponds to the portion of the electropolishing process when the metal layer has nearly been removed from the surface of the wafer, but the trenches and/or vias remain filled with the metal layer.
- the reflectivity begins to change because the barrier layer and/or dielectric layer typically has a different reflection rate than the metal layer.
- point C corresponds to the portion of the electropolishing process when the metal layer has been completely removed from the surface of the wafer. At this point, the reflectivity begins to level off again.
- end-point detector 1006 can be configured to provide the optical reflection rate of an area of the wafer during electropolishing.
- the electropolishing process can be stopped or ended when R light measured by end-point detector 1006 reaches a predetermined rate R target .
- R target can be determined experimentally. For example, wafers can be processed at various R target settings to determine the value that produces the desired wafer surface profile. Once this value is determined, it can be used to process additional wafers.
- R target can be calculated based on the pattern structure on the wafer. More particularly, each area of the wafer includes a portion with metal layers formed within trenches and/or vias and the remaining portion with a barrier layer and/or dielectric layer.
- end-point detector 1006 provides a measurement of the optical reflectivity R light .
- the target optical reflectivity R target can be calculated based on the pattern density PD data obtained from the mask design of the wafer.
- the measured optical reflectivity R light equals the target optical reflectivity R target ,then electropolishing can be stopped for that area.
- the electropolishing process can be stopped or ended entirely (for example, by turning off the power supply).
- the electropolishing rate can be reduced to continue to monitor the reflectivity of the metal layer on the wafer surface. If the reflectivity increases (for example, as in unpolished patches or areas of the wafer), then the electropolishing rate can be increased.
- the power supply (not shown) can be operated in DC mode or in a variety of pulse modes. Additionally, it can be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Further, when a pulsed power supply is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied.
- wafer 1004 can be electropolished in any pattern or order.
- wafer 1004 can be electropolished beginning from the edge to the center of wafer 1004 .
- wafer 1004 can be electropolished beginning and ending from any points between the edge and the center of wafer 1004 .
- the signals from end-point detectors 1006 can be used to control the speed of the rotation and horizontal movement of wafer 1004 . It can also be used to control the polishing power and the polishing rate used. More particularly, the signals from end-point detectors 1006 can be provided to an analyzer 1009 . Analyzer 1009 is configured to evaluate and process the signals received from end-point detectors 1006 . Based on these signals, analyzer 1009 can then control the rotation and horizontal movement of wafer 1004 , the polishing power, and the polishing rate. Analyzer 1009 can include any convenient processing processor, such as an electronic circuit, a computer chip, a computer, and the like. Analyzer 1009 can also include any convenient programming instructions or software needed to carry out the various functions described herein.
- C 1 is a constant.
- N can include any number including integer, rational and irrational fraction. Values for C 1 and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile.
- ⁇ is the speed of rotation of wafer 1004 .
- r is the distance between nozzle 1008 and the center of wafer 1004 .
- v 0 is the constant tangent speed of the area of wafer 1004 relative to nozzle 1008 .
- P polishing is the electropolishing power being applied. This can include DC or pulsed power. It can include power provided in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes.
- the duty cycle can be constant or varied.
- C 2 is a constant.
- N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C 2 and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile.
- v r C 3 / ⁇ [R light ( r , ⁇ ) ⁇ R target ( r , ⁇ )] N r ⁇
- v r is the horizontal speed of wafer 1004 .
- r is the distance between nozzle 1008 and center of wafer 1004 .
- C 3 is a constant.
- N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C 3 and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile.
- P polishing is the electropolishing power being applied. This can include DC or pulsed power. It can include power provided in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Also, when a pulsed power is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied.
- C 4 and C 5 are constants.
- N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C 4 , C 5 , and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile.
- ⁇ ⁇ C 6 / [ R light ⁇ ( r , ⁇ ) - R target ⁇ ( r , ⁇ ) ] N
- ⁇ is the speed of rotation of wafer 1004 .
- N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C 6 , C 7 , and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile.
- C r is the distance between nozzle 1008 and the center of wafer 1004 .
- V r is the horizontal speed of wafer 1004 .
- P polishing is the electropolishing power being applied. This can include DC or pulsed power. It can include power provided in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Also, when a pulsed power is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied.
- C 5 , C 6 , and C 7 are constants.
- N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C 5 , C 6 , C 7 , and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile.
- w can be in the range of about 1 to about 500 revolutions per minute.
- Vr can be in the range of about 0.01 cm/second to about 1 cm/second.
- R can be in the range of about 0.1 cm to about 15 cm for a nozzle with an inner diameter of about 0.1 cm.
- the polishing current density can range between 0 mA/cm 2 to about 50 mA/cm 2 .
- the polishing voltage density can range between about 0 volts to about 5 volts. It should be recognized, however, that these values are only exemplary and that they can vary depending on the particular application.
- another embodiment of the present invention includes an additional end-point detector 1010 .
- end-point detector 1010 can be configured to provide the optical reflection profile after electropolishing of an area of the wafer surface.
- end-point detectors 1006 and 1010 can be configured to provide the optical reflection profile during and after electropolishing of an area on the wafer surface.
- end-point detector 1012 can be configured to provide the optical reflection profile before electropolishing of an area of the wafer surface.
- the difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors 1010 and 1012 can be used to determine the electropolishing rate in a single rotation of wafer 1004 .
- This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed of wafer 1004 , and the like.
- end-point detector 1014 can be configured to provide the electropolishing status after one complete electropolishing cycle (i.e., the nozzle moves relatively from center to edge of the wafer one time). This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed of wafer 1004 , and the like.
- end-point detector 1016 can be configured to provide the electropolishing status before electropolishing.
- the difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors 1014 and 1016 can be used to determine the electropolishing rate of one electropolishing cycle.
- This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed of wafer 1004 , and the like.
- end-point detector 1020 can be configured to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished.
- the difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors 1010 and 1020 can be used to determine the polishing profile in the area being electropolished on a real-time basis (i.e., at the time of electropolishing). This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed of wafer 1004 , and the like.
- another embodiment of the present invention includes a third end-point detector 1030 inside of nozzle 1008 .
- end-point detector 1030 can be configured to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished.
- the difference of reflection rate rate measured by end-point detectors 1010 , 1020 , and 1030 can be used to determine the polishing profile in the area being electropolished.
- This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed of wafer 1004 , and the like.
- another embodiment of the present invention includes a fourth end-point detector 1040 inside of nozzle 1008 .
- end-point detector 1040 can be configured to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished.
- the difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors 1010 and 120 can be used to determine the electropolishing profile in the x-direction (as depicted in FIG. 15C ).
- the difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors 1030 and 1040 can be used to determine the electropolishing profile in the y-direction.
- This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed of wafer 1004 , and the like.
- another embodiment of the present invention includes a fifth end-point detector 1050 inside of nozzle 1008 . It should be recognized that any number of end-point detectors can be disposed within nozzle 1008 to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished.
- end-point detectors described above have been depicted as having circular shapes. But it should be recognized that they can also include various alternative shapes.
- end-point detector 1006 is depicted as having a circular, a triangular, a square, a trapezoidal, and an elliptical shape.
- nozzle 1008 has been depicted as having a circular shape. But it should be recognized that it can also include various alternative shapes.
- nozzle 1008 is depicted as having a circular, a triangular, a square, a trapezoidal, and an elliptical shape.
- another embodiment of the present invention includes drive mechanism 1000 , chuck 1002 , wafer 1004 .
- the present embodiment also includes a polishing receptacle 1100 , which is divided into multiple sections by section walls 1103 , 1105 , 1107 , and 1109 . Cathodes 1 , 2 , 3 , and 4 are disposed within these sections. Additionally, end-point detectors 600 , 602 , 604 , 606 , 608 , 610 , 612 , and 614 are configured measure the electropolishing uniformity of wafer 1004 .
- an optical fiber 504 can be connected to each end-point detector 600 , 602 , 604 , 606 , 608 , 610 , 612 , and 614 . As depicted in FIG. 67A , optical fiber 504 extends into the sections of polishing receptacle 1100 .
- the end-point detectors are also connected to analyzer 1009 that is configured to evaluate and/or process the signals received from the end-point detectors.
- Analyzer 1009 can be any convenient processor, such as a circuit, a computer chip, a computer, and the like. Analyzer 1009 can also include any convenient programming instructions or software needed to carry out the various functions described herein
- wafer 1004 can be electropolished by delivering an electrolyte into polishing receptacle 1100 . More particularly, the electrolyte can be directed to any one or more of the sections of receptacle 1100 defined by section walls 1103 , 1105 , 1107 , and 1109 . An electrical charge is then applied to the electrolyte through cathodes 1 , 2 , 3 , and 4 . During the electropolishing process, wafer 1004 is held by chuck 1002 and rotated by drive mechanism 1000 . In the manner described above, this electropolishing process can be controlled using end-point detectors 600 , 602 , 604 , 606 , 608 , 610 , 612 , and 614 to produce the desired wafer surface profile.
- an additional electropolishing process can be provided by injecting electrolyte through a nozzle disposed within the first section defined by section wall 1109 .
- An electrical charge is applied through cathode 1 .
- Wafer 1004 is then translated horizontally by drive mechanism 1000 .
- this electropolishing process can be controlled using end-point detectors 606 and 608 .
- step 3 the electrolyte flow and power can be turned off based on target optical reflectivity calculated from pattern density data rather than a predetermined value for the optical reflectivity.
- step 4 wafer 1004 can be moved in various directions to apply the electrolyte moves across wafer 1004 in any desired pattern.
- FIG. 47 shows an embodiment configured to be a stand-alone, fully computer-controlled wafer-processing tool with automatic wafer transfer, cleaning module with wafer dry-in and dry-out capability. It preferably includes five stacked polishing receptacles 300 , 302 , 304 , 306 and 308 , five stacked cleaning/dry chambers 310 , 312 , 314 , 316 and 318 , robot 322 , wafer cassettes 320 and 321 , electrolyte reservoir 36 , and plumbing box 330 .
- polishing bath 300 preferably includes a plurality of cathodes, a plurality of power supplies, a plurality of section walls or tubes, a wafer chuck, and a driving mechanism, which rotates or oscillates wafer 31 during the electropolishing process.
- Electrolyte reservoir 36 preferably includes a temperature control sensor.
- Plumbing box 330 preferably includes of a pump, LMFCs, valves, filters, and plumbing.
- the polishing system further preferably includes a computer control hardware and an appropriate operating software package. The operation process sequence is described as follows:
- FIG. 48 shows the process sequence for polishing multiple wafers simultaneously.
- the process sequence for polishing multiple wafers is similar to that for electropolishing a single wafer, except that the computer checks for any unprocessed wafers remaining in cassette 320 or 321 after process step I. If there is an unprocessed wafer remaining in cassette 320 or 321 , then the system will return to step A (i.e., loading new cassettes or exchanging cassettes). If there is still an unprocessed wafer remaining in cassette 320 and/or 321 , the system will return to step D (i.e., robot 322 picks up the unprocessed wafer from the cassette and transports it to one of the polishing receptacles).
- step A i.e., loading new cassettes or exchanging cassettes
- step D i.e., robot 322 picks up the unprocessed wafer from the cassette and transports it to one of the polishing receptacles.
- Process step E can preferably include a two-process step, the first being to selectively electropolish metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) on the wafer, and the second being to electropolish metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) on the whole wafer simultaneously.
- the cleaning process can be performed in different chambers.
- the cleaning process can also consist of several steps, and each step can use different solutions, different concentrations of solutions, or different hardware.
- the number of polishing receptacles and number of cleaning/drying chambers can be varied from 1 to 10 as shown in the following table: TABLE 4 Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No. of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 polishing receptacles No. of 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cleaning/ drying chambers
- types 4, 5, 6 and 7 in the above table are preferred.
- FIG. 49 shows an embodiment configured as a wafer-polishing tool.
- the embodiment of FIG. 49 is similar to that of FIG. 47 , except that cassette 320 can be moved up and down by a robot 323 .
- the position of cassette 320 can be moved up and down to match the position of the polishing receptacle or cleaning/dry chamber.
- robot 322 does not need to move in the Z direction when picking up an unprocessed wafer from cassette 320 or putting a polished dry wafer back into cassette 320 .
- the operating speed of robot 323 can be suitably increased.
- FIG. 50 still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment shown in FIG. 50 is similar to that of FIG. 47 except that robot 322 itself can move in the X direction. Accordingly, robot 322 need not rotate about the Z axis.
- FIG. 51 yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment shown in FIG. 51 is similar to that of FIG. 47 except that polishing receptacles and cleaning/drying chambers are put in one column. Compared with the embodiment of FIG. 47 , the foot print of the system is reduced, however wafer throughput can be slower.
- FIG. 52 another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.
- the embodiment shown in FIG. 52 preferably includes three columns of polishing receptacles and cleaning/drying chambers, linearly moveable robot 322 , operation screen 340 , two cassettes stacked adjacent to each other, plumbing box 330 , and electrolyte reservoir 36 .
- the polishing process steps are similar to those described in FIG. 47 .
- FIG. 54 shows still another embodiment of apparatus for polishing metal layer 121 ( FIG. 1A ) in accordance with the present invention.
- the embodiment of FIG. 54 is similar to that of FIGS. 28A and 28B except that multi-jets are replaced by a single jet 255 .
- cathode jet 255 remains stationary while wafer 31 is moved along the X-axis (left and right). More particularly, in the present exemplary embodiment, cathode jet 255 injects electrolyte onto selected portions of wafer 31 , while wafer 31 is rotated and moved in the X-axis substantially simultaneously by drive means 30 and guide bar 35 . When wafer 31 is moved to the left side, cathode jet 255 injects electrolyte on to the center portion of wafer 31 .
- cathode jet 255 injects electrolyte onto the periphery portion of wafer 31 .
- the rotation speed of wafer 31 can be kept at a constant rate during the polishing process.
- the speed with which wafer 31 is moved along the x-axis can be varied from large to small as drive means 30 moves the center portion of wafer 31 away from the cathode jet 255 .
- Vx ⁇ C / [ ⁇ ⁇ ( x + r ) 2 ] ⁇ when ⁇ ⁇ x ⁇ r ⁇ C / ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ [ ( x + r ) 2 - ( x - r ) 2 ] ⁇ ⁇ when ⁇ ⁇ x > r
- C is a constant
- x is the distance between center of wafer 31 and cathode jet 255 in the x-axis
- r the radius of liquid column made by cathode jet 255 .
- the angle between wafer 31 and cathode jet 255 can be kept at any constant angle, or the angle can be changed during the polishing process.
- the wafer itself can be placed at any angle relative to polishing receptacle 100 .
- jet 255 can be moved instead of moving wafer 31 , or both jet 255 and wafer 31 can be moved to achieve the same results.
- wafer 31 can be immersed in the electrolyte, instead of being contacted by the jet stream of the electrolyte.
- a layer of metal can be replated on wafer 31 to fix recesses 127 .
- this replating process can be performed using any convenient plating process.
- One such process is an electroless plating process.
- electroless plating differs from electroplating in that electrodes are not used in electroless plating.
- metal ions are provided in an electroless solution. More particularly the electroless solution typically contains a reducing agent that facilitates plating.
- electroless plating is particularly advantageous in this application in that metal layer 121 in trenches 125 will tend to promote plating, while barrier layer 122 will not. Also, electroless plating generally produces a more uniform deposition as it does not suffer from ohmic effects. Thus, recesses 127 can be fixed (i.e., filled in) using an electroless plating process.
- electroless plating module 1101 in accordance with one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- electroless plating module 1101 is configured to replate a metal layer on wafer 31 ( FIG. 1B ) to fix recesses 127 ( FIG. 1B ).
- electroless plating module 1101 can be configured to clean and to dry wafer 1128 . It should be recognized, however, that electroless plating module 1101 can be configured to perform various processes depending on the particular application. For example, as will be described with reference to various alternative embodiments, electroless plating module 1101 can be configured to perform an etching process.
- electroless plating module 1101 is configured to use any electroless solutions suitable for use with copper, such as copper sulfate (CuSiO4—5H2O) at about 8 g/l, EDTA (tetrasodium) at about 14 g/l, formaldehyde (NCOOH) at 20 ml/l, Methyldichlorosilane (CH3Cl2SiH) at 0.25 g/l. It should be recognized, however, that the electroless solution can include various chemistries depending on the application.
- CuSiO4—5H2O copper sulfate
- EDTA tetrasodium
- NCOOH formaldehyde
- CH3Cl2SiH Methyldichlorosilane
- the electroless solution is maintained at between about 20 degrees Celsius and about 80 degrees Celsius. Accordingly, a deposition rate of about 100 Angstroms per minute to about 1000 Angstroms per minute can be obtained. It should be recognized, however, that the electroless solution can be maintained at various temperatures and that various deposition rates can be used.
- electroless plating module 1101 preferably includes a module chamber 1116 , a cover 1126 , a wafer loading door 1124 , a chuck 1120 , a motor 1118 , and liquid/gas injection pipe 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1110 , and 1112 .
- module chamber 1116 , cover 1126 and loading door 1126 are configured to seal electroless plating module 1101 .
- electroless plating module 1101 can be sealed to isolate the environment within electroless plating module 1101 from the outside environment. This has the advantage of preventing contaminants from the outside environment from entering electroless plating module 1101 .
- electroless plating module 1101 can include various alternative configurations.
- electroless plating module 1101 can be configured without cover 1126 and loading door 1126 . Accordingly, in this configuration, direct access can be gained to electroless plating module 1101 without having to open and close wafer loading door 1124 .
- electroless plating module 1101 can include two wafer loading doors 1324 and 1332 . Accordingly, wafer 1128 can be loaded from one side and removed from another side.
- electroless plating module 1101 includes a cover 1126 and one loading door 1124 .
- loading door 1124 opens to permit access into electroless plating module 1101 .
- loading door 1124 opens to permit loading and removal of wafer 1128 from electroless plating module 1101 .
- loading door 1124 can be opened and closed manually or using any convenient actuator, such as spring, motor, robot, and the like.
- wafer 1128 is loaded and removed from electroless plating module 1101 using robot 1122 .
- robot 1122 can be a robot specifically dedicated to loading and unloading electroless plating module 1101 .
- electroless plating module 1101 can be a component of a wafer processing tool in which robot 1122 is a multipurpose robot.
- wafer 1128 can be loaded and removed using various wafer transfer systems, such as air tracks, water tracks, and the like.
- wafer 1128 can be manually loaded and removed from electroless plating module 1101 .
- injection pipes 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1110 , and 1112 are configured to deliver various fluids and/or gases to electroless plating module 1101 .
- electroless plating module 1101 is depicted having seven injection pipes, it should be recognized that electroless plating module 1101 can include any number of injection pipes. It should also be recognized that injection pipes 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1110 , and 1112 can be formed from any convenient material depending on the nature of the fluids and/or gases to be delivered.
- any number of injection pipes 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1110 , and 1112 include a nozzle to more uniformly deliver the various fluids and/or gases to electroless plating module 1101 . It should be recognized, however, that injection pipes 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1110 , and 1112 can include various shapes and/or attachments to enhance the uniformity of the delivery of fluids and/or gases. For example, injection pipes 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1110 , and 1112 can include a diffuser.
- wafer chuck 1120 and motor 1118 are configured to hold and to rotate wafer 1128 within electroless plating module 1101 . More particularly, wafer chuck 1120 includes a plurality of locks 1121 configured to hold wafer 1128 when rotated and to release wafer 1128 when stopped. In one embodiment, locks 1121 can include any convenient centrifugal-force locks. Motor 1118 can include any convenient motor, such as a step motor, a DC motor, and the like. Additionally, motor 1118 includes rotation speed control and homing function.
- wafer 1128 can be replated to fix recesses 127 ( FIG. 1B ).
- the following is an exemplary process for replating wafer 1128 using electroless plating module 1101 :
- wafer 1128 after wafer 1128 has been replated, it can be planarized. More particularly, with reference to Figs 1 C and 1 D, metal layer 126 that was replated on trenches 125 is planarized, and barrier layer 122 is removed. In one embodiment described earlier, this process was performed using a CMP process. With reference again to FIGS. 68A and 68B , in the present exemplary embodiment, this process can be performed using electroless plating module 1101 :
- wafer 1128 can include a metal seed layer.
- it can be advantageous to remove this seed layer from the edges of wafer 1128 .
- electroless plating module 1101 can be used to remove the seed layer from the edges of wafer 1128 :
- Step 1 Loading door 1124 moves to an open position.
- Step 2 Robot 1122 loads wafer 1128 into electroless plating module 1101 .
- electroless plating module 1101 can be integrated into a wafer processing tool.
- a wafer processing tool 2010 in accordance with one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- wafer processing tool 2010 includes an electropolishing station 2000 , an electroless plating station 2100 , wafer handling stations 2200 and 2210 , and a robot 2220 .
- electropolishing station 2000 includes five stacked electropolishing receptacles (modules) 2020 .
- Electroless plating station 2100 includes five stacked electroless plating modules 2120 . Accordingly, as many as five wafers can be electropolished and/or electroless plated at one time. It should be recognized, however, that electropolishing station 2000 and electroless plating station 2100 can include any number of electropolishing modules and electroless plating modules depending on the particular application. For example, for a low volume application, electropolishing station 2000 and electroless plating station 2100 can be configured with one electropolishing module 2020 and one electroless plating module 2120 .
- the ratio of electropolishing modules 2020 to electroless plating modules 2120 can vary depending on the particular application.
- wafer processing tool 2010 can be configured with more electropolishing modules 2020 than electroless plating modules 2120 .
- wafer processing tool 2010 can be configured with more electroless plating modules 2120 than electropolishing modules 2020 .
- electropolishing modules 2020 and electroless plating modules 2120 are configured as vertical stacks. In this manner, the number of wafers processed can be increased without increasing the footprint of (the amount of floor space occupied by) wafer processing tool 2010 . In the increasingly competitive semiconductor industry, increasing the ratio of wafers processed per square feet of fabrication spaced occupied by wafer processing tool 2010 can be advantageous.
- wafer processing tool 2010 includes wafer-handling stations 2200 and 2210 . More particularly, wafer-handling stations 2200 and 2210 can include a wafer cassette 2160 for holding wafers. In one embodiment, wafer cassette 2160 can include a standard mechanical interface (SMIF) 2320 . It should be recognized that wafer cassette 216 can include any convenient wafer holding and/or carrier apparatus.
- SMIF standard mechanical interface
- robot 2220 is configured to remove an unprocessed wafer from wafer cassette 2160 and transport the wafer to any one of the electropolishing modules 2020 . After the wafer is electropolished, robot 2220 transports the wafer to any one of the electroless plating modules 2120 . After the wafer is plated, etched, cleaned, and tried, robot 2220 then transports the wafer back to wafer cassette 2160 . Although a single wafer cassette 2160 is depicted in FIG. 70 , it should be recognized that wafer-handling stations 2200 and 2210 can include any number of wafer cassettes 2160 .
- wafer-handling station 2200 and 2210 can include various configurations depending on the particular application.
- wafer-handling station 2200 and 2210 can each include at least one wafer cassette 2160 .
- a wafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafers is provided at wafer-handling station 2200 .
- the wafers are removed, processed, then returned to the same wafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200 .
- another wafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafers is provided at wafer-handling station 2210 .
- wafer-processing tool 2010 can begin processing the unprocessed wafers from wafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2210 .
- the processed wafers in wafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200 can then be removed and replaced with yet another wafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafers. In this manner, wafer-processing tool 2010 can be operated continuously without unintended interruption.
- a wafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafer can be provided at wafer-handling station 2200 .
- An empty wafer cassette 2160 can be provided at wafer-handling station 2210 .
- the unprocessed wafers from wafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200 can be processed then returned to the empty wafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2210 .
- This configuration also facilitates continuously operation of processing tool 2010 .
- This configuration has the advantage that one of the two handling stations 2200 and 2210 can be designated for unprocessed wafers and the other for processed wafers. In this manner, an operator or a robot is less likely to mistake a wafer cassette 2160 containing processed wafers for one with unprocessed wafers and vice versa.
- wafer-processing tool 2010 includes housing unit 2300 for housing the various electrical and mechanical components of wafer-processing tool 2010 , such as power supplies, filters, wires, plumbing, chemical containers, pumps, valves, and the like.
- Wafer-processing tool 2010 can also include a computer 2040 for controlling the operation of wafer-processing tool 2040 . More particularly, computer 2040 can be configured with an appropriate software program to implement the processing steps set forth above.
- wafer processing tool 4010 in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- wafer processing tool 4010 includes an electroplating station 4000 , an electroless plating station 4100 , an electropolishing station 4500 , wafer handling stations 4420 , 4440 , and 4460 , and robots 4220 and 4400 .
- robot 4220 is configured to remove an unprocessed wafer from wafer handling station 4420 , 4440 , or 4460 .
- Robot 4220 transports the wafer into any one of the electroplating modules 4020 in electroplating station 4000 .
- metal layer 121 FIG. 1A
- metal layer 121 FIG. 1A
- dielectric layer 123 FIG. 1A
- wafer processing tool 4010 can include any number of electroplating modules 4020 .
- robot 4220 transports the wafer into any one of the electroless plating modules 4120 in electroless plating station 4100 .
- electroless plating module 4120 the wafer is cleaned, but not replated.
- Robot 4400 then transports the wafer into any one of the electropolishing modules 4520 in electropolishing station 4500 .
- electropolishing module 4520 the wafer is electropolished.
- Robot 4400 then transports the wafer back into electroless plating module 4120 . At this point, the wafer is replated, etched, cleaned, and dried. Robot 4220 then returns the wafer to wafer handling station 4420 , 4440 , or 4460 .
- wafer processing tool 5001 in accordance with still another exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown.
- wafer processing tool 5001 includes electroplating modules 5000 , 5002 , and 5004 , cleaning modules 5010 , 5012 , and 5014 , thermal annealing modules 5020 , 5022 , and 5024 , and electropolishing modules 5030 , 5032 , and 5034 .
- wafer processing tool 5001 includes support tables 5300 , 5500 , and 5700 , which are supported by support members 5150 and 5150 .
- Each support table includes an electroplating module, a cleaning module, a thermal annealing module, and an electropolishing module.
- support table 5300 includes electroplating module 5000 , cleaning module 5010 , thermal annealing module 5020 , and electropolishing module 5030 .
- Support table 5500 includes electroplating module 5002 , cleaning module 5012 , thermal annealing module 5022 , and electropolishing module 5032 .
- Support table 5700 includes electroplating module 5004 , cleaning module 5014 , thermal annealing module 5024 , and electropolishing module 5034 .
- wafer processing tool 5001 includes rotary tables 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 , which are supported by support member 5140 .
- Each rotary table 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 includes four wafer chuck mechanisms. More particularly, rotary table 5200 includes wafer chuck mechanisms 5100 , 5104 , 5106 , and 5108 .
- Rotary table 5400 includes wafer chuck mechanisms 5110 , 5114 , 5116 , and 5108 .
- Rotary table 5600 includes wafer chuck mechanisms 5120 , 5124 , 5126 , and 5128 .
- a motor 5048 rotates support member 5140 , which then rotates rotary tables 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 .
- Bearings 5042 , 5044 , and 5046 allow support tables 5300 , 5500 , and 5700 to remain stationary.
- the wafer held by the wafer chuck mechanisms can be processed in each of the processing modules (i.e., the electroplating module, cleaning module, thermal annealing module, and electropolishing module) on each the support table.
- a robot 5080 transports wafers from wafer handling station 5082 , 5084 , or 5086 to pre-aligner (not shown). Robot 5080 then transports the wafers into the three stacked wafer chuck mechanisms ( FIGS. 5B and 5C ). For example, with reference to FIG. 72C , robot 5080 ( FIG. 5A ) can transport unprocessed wafers into wafer chuck mechanisms 5100 , 5110 , and 5120 .
- rotary table 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 then rotate wafer chuck mechanisms 5100 , 5110 , and 5120 to electroplating modules 5000 , 5002 , and 5004 .
- robot 5080 FIG. 72A
- robot 5080 can transport more unprocessed wafers into the wafer chuck mechanisms 5108 , 5118 , and 5128 .
- rotary table 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 then rotate wafer chuck mechanisms 5100 , 5110 , and 5120 to cleaning modules 5010 , 5012 , and 5014 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5108 , 5118 , and 5128 rotate to electroplating modules 5000 , 5002 , and 5004 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5106 , 5116 , and 5126 rotate to receive unprocessed wafers from robot 5080 ( FIG. 72A ).
- rotary table 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 then rotate wafer chuck mechanisms 5100 , 5110 , and 5120 to thermal annealing modules 5020 , 5022 , and 5024 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5108 , 5118 , and 5128 rotate to cleaning modules 5010 , 5012 , and 5014 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5106 , 5116 , and 5126 rotate to electroplating modules 5000 , 5002 , and 5004 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5104 , 5114 , and 5124 rotate to receive unprocessed wafer from robot 5080 ( FIG. 72A ).
- the metal layer within the trenches and/or vias of the wafer are annealed to produce a more uniform crystal structure.
- Annealing the wafer in this manner has the advantage that the electrical characteristics of the metal layer within the trenches and/or vias will be more stable. Otherwise, the electrical characteristics of the metal layer within the trenches and/or vias can change as the metal layer naturally anneals over a period of time after processing of the wafer. Additionally, annealing the wafer prior to electropolishing can facilitate a more planar wafer surface. Otherwise, the surface of the metal layer within the trenches and/or vias can change as the metal layer naturally anneals over a period of time after processing of the wafer.
- rotary table 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 then rotate wafer chuck mechanisms 5100 , 5110 , and 5120 to electropolishing modules 5030 , 5032 , and 5034 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5108 , 5118 , and 5128 rotate to thermal annealing modules 5020 , 5022 , and 5024 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5106 , 5116 , and 5126 rotate to cleaning modules 5010 , 5012 , and 5014 .
- wafer chuck mechanisms 5104 , 5114 , and 5124 rotate to electroplating modules 5000 , 5002 , and 5004 .
- robots 5040 , 5042 , and 5044 transport the wafers from chuck mechanisms 5100 , 5110 , and 5120 to electroless plating modules 5070 , 5072 , and 5074 .
- robots 5040 , 5042 , and 5044 are supported on support tables 5302 , 5502 , and 5702 , respectively, which are supported by support member 5046 .
- electroless plating modules 5070 , 5072 , and 5074 are supported on support tables 5304 , 5504 , and 5704 , respectively, which are supported by support members 5078 .
- rotary table 5200 , 5400 , and 5600 rotate to repeat the entire process. Also, when the wafers are replated, etched, cleaned, and dried, they are removed from electroless plating modules 5070 , 5072 , and 5074 and transported to wafer handling station 5082 , 5084 , or 5086 ( FIG. 5A ) by robot 5080 ( FIG. 72A ).
- Wafer processing tool 5001 also includes a metrology station 5088 , which can include various tools to inspect and examine the wafer during or after processing for quality control and to tune the various wafer processing systems.
- metrology station 5088 can include four-point probes for measuring resistivity of the metal layer after electroplating.
- Metrology station 5088 can also include a scanning tunneling microscope (STM) or an atomic force microscope (AFM) for measuring the surface profile of the wafer.
- Metrology station 5088 can further include an optical microscope for measuring surface defects on the wafer. It should be recognized that metrology station 5088 can include any combination of these tools or various additional tools depending on the application.
- Wafer processing tool 5001 can also include various additional processing stations depending on the particular application.
- wafer processing tool 5001 can include a dry or plasma stripping chamber. As described above, when the wafer includes a barrier layer, it is stripped away from the surface of the wafer. Dry or plasma stripping has the advantage that it does not produce many of the corrosion problems generally associated with wet etching.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Metallurgy (AREA)
- Materials Engineering (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Electrochemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Mechanical Treatment Of Semiconductor (AREA)
- Weting (AREA)
Abstract
An apparatus for detecting the end-point of an electropolishing process of a metal layer formed on a wafer includes an end-point detector. The end-point detector is disposed adjacent the nozzle used to electropolish the wafer. In one embodiment, the end-point detector is configured to measure the optical reflectivity of the portion of the wafer being electropolished.
Description
- The present application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/276,286, titled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR END-POINT DETECTION, filed on May 3,2001, which is a 35 U.S.C. §371 National Stage of International Patent Application No. PCT/US01/14652, filed May 3, 2001, titled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR END-POINT DETECTION, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/570,566, filed May 12, 2000, titled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR END-POINT DETECTION, now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 6,447,668, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/497,894, filed Feb. 4, 2000, titled METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ELECTROPOLISHING METAL INTERCONNECTIONS ON SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES, now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 6,440,295, which is a continuation of PCT/US99/15506, filed Jul. 8, 1999, titled METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ELECTROPOLISHING METAL INTERCONNECTIONS ON SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES, which claims benefit under 35 U.S.C. §119(e) of U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/092,316, filed Jul. 9, 1998, titled METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ELECTROPOLISHING METAL INTERCONNECTIONS ON SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES, all of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention generally relates to methods and apparatus for electropolishing metal layers on semiconductor wafers. More particularly, the present invention relates to a system for electropolishing interconnections in semiconductor devices formed on semiconductor wafers.
- 2. Description of the Related Art
- In general, semiconductor devices are manufactured or fabricated on disks of semiconducting materials called wafers or slices. More particularly, wafers are initially sliced from a silicon ingot. The wafers then undergo multiple masking, etching, and deposition processes to form the electronic circuitry of semiconductor devices.
- During the past decades, the semiconductor industry has increased the power of semiconductor devices in accordance with Moore's law, which predicts that the power of semiconductor devices will double every 18 months. This increase in the power of semiconductor devices has been achieved in part by decreasing the feature size (i.e., the smallest dimension present on a device) of these semiconductor devices. In fact, the feature size of semiconductor devices has quickly gone from 0.35 microns to 0.25 microns, and now to 0.18 microns. Undoubtedly, this trend toward smaller semiconductor devices is likely to proceed well beyond the sub-0.18 micron stage.
- However, one potential limiting factor to developing more powerful semiconductor devices is the increasing signal delays at the interconnections (the lines of conductors, which connect elements of a single semiconductor device and/or connect any number of semiconductor devices together). As the feature size of semiconductor devices has decreased, the density of interconnections on the devices has increased. However, the closer proximity of interconnections increases the line-to-line capacitance of the interconnections, which results in greater signal delay at the interconnections. In general, interconnection delays have been found to increase with the square of the reduction in feature size. In contrast, gate delays (i.e., delay at the gates or mesas of semiconductor devices) have been found to increase linearly with the reduction in feature size.
- One conventional approach to compensate for this increase in interconnection delay has been to add more layers of metal. However, this approach has the disadvantage of increasing production costs associated with forming the additional layers of metal. Furthermore, these additional layers of metal generate additional heat, which can be adverse to both chip performance and reliability.
- Consequently, the semiconductor industry has started to use copper rather than aluminum to form the metal interconnections. One advantage of copper is that it has greater conductivity than aluminum. Also, copper is less resistant to electromigration (meaning that a line formed from copper will have less tendency to thin under current load) than aluminum. However, one significant disadvantage to using copper has been its tendency to bleed into the silicon substrate, thus contaminating the semiconductor device.
- Additionally, before copper can be widely used for interconnections, new processing techniques are required. More particularly, in a conventional damascene process, metal is patterned within canal-like trenches and/or vias. The deposited metal is then polished back using chemical mechanical polishing (“CMP”). In general, depending on the interconnection structure design, anywhere from half a micron to 1.5 millimeters of metal needs to be polished. Polishing such a large quantity of metal using conventional CMP requires a long polishing time and consumes a large quantity of slurry, which leads to high manufacturing costs.
- The present invention relates to an end-point detector for detecting the end-point of an electropolishing process of a metal layer formed on a wafer. The end-point detector is disposed adjacent the nozzle used to electropolish the wafer. In one embodiment, the end-point detector is configured to measure the optical reflectivity of the portion of the wafer being electropolished.
- The subject matter of the present invention is particularly pointed out and distinctly claimed in the concluding portion of the specification. The present invention, however, both as to organization and method of operation, may best be understood by reference to the following description taken in conjunction with the claims and the accompanying drawing figures, in which like parts may be referred to by like numerals:
-
FIGS. 1A-1D are cross-section views of a semiconductor wafer in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 2 is a flow chart for processing wafers in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIGS. 3A-3C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIGS. 4A-4D are cross-section views of another wafer in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 5 is another flow chart for processing wafers in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIGS. 6A-6C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of another wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 7A is a top view of a portion of an electropolishing apparatus in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 7B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 7B-7B inFIG. 7A , and partly in block diagram form, of the electropolishing apparatus shown inFIG. 7A ; -
FIG. 8 is a plot of various waveforms, which may be used in conjunction with the electropolishing apparatus shown inFIG. 7A ; -
FIG. 9A-9D are top views of a portion of alternative embodiments of electropolishing apparatus in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 10 is a plot of various waveforms depicting a portion of an electropolishing process in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 11A is a top view of a portion of another alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 11B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 11B-11B inFIG. 11A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 11A ; -
FIG. 12A is a top view of a portion of a second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 12B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 12B-12B inFIG. 12A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 12A ; -
FIG. 13A is a top view of a portion of a third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 13B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 13B-13B inFIG. 13A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 13A ; -
FIG. 14A is a top view of a portion of a fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 14B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 14B-14B inFIG. 14A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 14A ; -
FIG. 15 is a cross section view of a fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 16A is a top view of a portion of a sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 16B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 16B-16B inFIG. 16A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 16A ; -
FIG. 17A is a top view of a portion of a seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 17B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 17B-17B inFIG. 17A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 17A ; -
FIG. 18A is a cross section view of an eighth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 18B is a cross section view of a ninth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 19A is a cross section view of a tenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 19B is a cross section view of an eleventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 20A is a top view of a portion of a twelfth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 20B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 20B-20B inFIG. 20A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 20A ; -
FIG. 21A is a top view of a portion of a thirteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 21B is a top view of a portion of a fourteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 22A is a top view of a portion of a fifteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 22B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 22B-22B inFIG. 22A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 22A ; -
FIG. 23A is a top view of a portion of a sixteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 23B is a top view of a portion of a seventeenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 23C is a top view of a portion of an eighteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 24A is a top view of a portion of a nineteenth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 24B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 24B-24B inFIG. 24A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 24A ; -
FIG. 25 is a top view of a portion of a twentieth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 26 is a top view of a portion of a twenty-first alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 27A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 27B is a top view of a portion of a twenty-third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 27C is a top view of a portion of a twenty-fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 28A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 28B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 28B-28B inFIG. 28A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 28A ; -
FIG. 29A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 29B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 29B-29B inFIG. 29A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 29A ; -
FIG. 30A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 30B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 30B-30B inFIG. 30A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 30A ; -
FIG. 31A is a top view of a portion of a twenty-eighth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 31B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 31B-31B inFIG. 31A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 31A ; -
FIG. 32A is a cross section view of a portion of a twenty-ninth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 32B is a cross section view of a portion of a thirtieth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 32C is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-first alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 32D is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 33 is a top view of a wafer undergoing electropolishing in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 34A is a top view of a portion of a thirty-third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 34B is a top view of a portion of a thirty-fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 34C is a top view of a portion of a thirty-fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 34D is a top view of a portion of a thirty-sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 35A is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 35B is a cross section view of a portion of a thirty-eighth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 36A is a top view of a portion of a thirty-ninth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 36B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 36B-36B inFIG. 36A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 36A ; -
FIG. 37 is a set of waveforms depicting a portion of an electropolishing process in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 38A is a top view of a portion of a fortieth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 38B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 38B-38B inFIG. 38A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 38A ; -
FIG. 39A is a top view of a portion of a forty-first alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 39B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 39B-39B inFIG. 39A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 39A ; -
FIG. 40A is a top view of a portion of a forty-second alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 40B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 40B-40B inFIG. 40A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 40A ; -
FIG. 41 is a set of waveform diagrams depicting a portion of an electropolishing process in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 42 is additional sets of waveforms, which may be used in conjunction with the present invention; -
FIG. 43A is a top view of a portion of a forty-third alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 43B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 43B-43B inFIG. 43A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 43A ; -
FIG. 44A is a top view of a portion of a forty-fourth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 44B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 44B-44B inFIG. 44A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 44A ; -
FIG. 45 is a view, partly in cross section, and partly in block diagram form, of a forty-fifth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 46 is a view, partly in cross section, and partly in block diagram form, of a forty-sixth alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIGS. 47A-47C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; - FIGS. 48 is a flow chart depicting the operation of a portion of software for controlling a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention;
-
FIGS. 49A-49C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of still another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 50 is a schematic top view of a portion of yet another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 51 is a schematic top view of a portion of another embodiment of a wafer-processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIGS. 52A-52C are schematic top, cross section, and side views, respectively, of still another embodiment of a wafer processing tool in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 53 is a waveform depicting a portion of a wafer processing operation in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 54A is a top view of a portion of a forty-seventh alternative embodiment in accordance with various aspects of the present invention; -
FIG. 54B is a view, partly in cross section, taken along theline 54B-54B inFIG. 54A , and partly in block diagram form, of the alternative embodiment shown inFIG. 54A ; -
FIG. 55 is a graph depicting the relationship between current and voltage in a pulsed power supply; -
FIG. 56 is a graph depicting the relationship between current and voltage in a DC power supply; -
FIG. 57 is a graph depicting the relationship between resistance and polishing time; -
FIG. 58 is a side view of a portion of an end-point detection system; -
FIG. 59 is a graph depicting the relationship between reflection rate and polishing time; -
FIG. 60 is a top view of a portion of an end-point detection system; -
FIG. 61 is a top view of a portion of another end-point detection system; -
FIG. 62 is a top view of a portion of still another end-point detection system; -
FIGS. 63A and 64B are schematics of various configurations of end-point detectors; -
FIGS. 64A through 64D are schematics of various configurations of end-point detectors; -
FIGS. 65A through 65E are cross-sectional views of various end-point detectors; -
FIGS. 66A through 66E are cross sectional views of various nozzles; -
FIGS. 67A and 67B are schematic side and top views, respectively, of a wafer processing tool; -
FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of an embodiment of an electroless plating module; -
FIG. 68B is a top cross section view of the embodiment shown inFIG. 68A ; -
FIG. 69A is a front perspective view of another embodiment of an electroless plating module; -
FIG. 69B is a top cross section view of the embodiment shown inFIG. 69A ; -
FIGS. 70A through 70C are top, front cross section, and side cross section views, respectively, of a wafer processing tool; -
FIGS. 71A through 71C are top, front cross section, and side cross section views, respectively, of another wafer processing tool; and -
FIGS. 72A through 72C are top and two cross sectional views, respectively, of still another wafer processing tool. - In order to provide a more thorough understanding of the present invention, the following description sets forth numerous specific details, such as specific material, parameters, and the like. It should be recognized, however, that such description is not intended as a limitation on the scope of the present invention, but is instead provided to enable a full and complete description of the exemplary embodiments.
- With reference to
FIG. 1A , asemiconductor wafer 31, according to one aspect of the present invention, suitably includes asubstrate layer 124. More particularly, in an exemplary embodiment of the present invention,substrate layer 124 preferably includes silicon. It should be recognized, however, thatsubstrate layer 124 can include various semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide and the like, depending on the particular application. -
Semiconductor wafer 31, according to another aspect of the present invention, suitably includes adielectric layer 123 formed on top ofsubstrate layer 124. In the present exemplary embodiment,dielectric layer 123 preferably includes silicon dioxide (SiO2).Dielectric layer 123 can be formed onsubstrate layer 124 using any convenient deposition method, such as chemical vapor deposition, evaporation, sputtering, and the like. - Additionally,
dielectric layer 123 can include various materials having dielectric constant (“K”) values lower than that of SiO2, these various materials being generally referred to as low-K materials, such as hydrogen-silsesquioxane (HSQ), Xerogel, polymer, aerogel, and the like. In comparison to SiO2, which has a dielectric constant of about 4.2, HSQ has a dielectric constant of about 3.0 to 2.5, and Xerogel has a dielectric constant of about 2.0. In general, a low-K material provides better electrical isolation. Therefore, the use of a low-K material asdielectric layer 123 can facilitate the formation of semiconductor devices with smaller feature sizes. - After
dielectric layer 123 is suitably formed onsubstrate layer 124, the circuitry for semiconductor devices is suitably formed using any convenient process. In the present exemplary embodiment, a damascene process is preferably used. Accordingly, trenches (also known as gaps) 125 and gates (also known as mesas) 126 are formed indielectric layer 123 using any convenient patterning method, such as photomasking, photolithography, microlithography, and the like. - Next, a
barrier layer 122, according to still another aspect of the present invention, is suitably formed on top ofdielectric layer 123. As depicted inFIG. 1A ,barrier layer 122 also suitably lines the walls oftrenches 125. As will be described below, when ametal layer 121, which includes copper, is formed on top ofdielectric layer 123,barrier layer 122 suitably prevents the copper inmetal layer 121 from diffusing intodielectric layer 123. Accordingly, in the present exemplary embodiment,barrier layer 122 preferably includes material resistant to the diffusion of copper, such as titanium, tantalum, tungsten, titanium-nitride, tantalum-nitride, tungsten-nitride, and the like.Barrier layer 122 can be deposited using any convenient deposition method, such as physical vapor deposition (PVD), chemical vapor deposition (CVD), and the like. It should be recognized, however, thatbarrier layer 122 can be omitted in some applications. For example, whendielectric layer 123 is formed from a material, which is resistant to diffusion of copper, or when the diffusion of copper intodielectric layer 123 will not adversely affect the performance of the semiconductor device. - As alluded to above, depending on the particular application,
metal layer 121, according to yet another aspect of the present invention, can be suitably formed on top ofbarrier layer 122 or formed on top ofdielectric layer 123. Additionally,metal layer 121 is suitably deposited withintrench 125. In the present exemplary embodiment,metal layer 121 preferably includes copper. Accordingly,metal layer 121 is formed on top ofbarrier layer 122 to suitably prevent the diffusion of copper frommetal layer 121 intodielectric layer 123. Although the present invention is particularly well suited for use withmetal layer 121 including copper, it should be recognized thatmetal layer 121 can include various electrically conductive materials, such as nickel, chromium, zinc, cadmium, silver, gold, rhodium, palladium, platinum, tin, lead, iron, indium, and the like. -
Metal layer 121 can be formed onbarrier layer 122 or ondielectric layer 123 using any convenient method, such as PVD, CVD, and the like. Additionally,metal layer 121 can be formed using an electroplating processing, which is described in copending application Ser. No. 09/232,864, entitled PLATING APPARATUS AND METHOD, filed on Jan. 15, 1999, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference. - With reference now to
FIG. 1B ,metal layer 121, formed on top ofmesas 126, according to another aspect of the present invention, is suitably electropolished. The present invention can be advantageously used in a damascene process, in which the circuitry of a semiconductor device is patterned into trenches or gaps. It should be recognized, however, that the present invention can be used in conjunction with various other processes without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. - With reference now to
FIGS. 7A and 7B , awafer electropolisher 50, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. In an exemplary embodiment of the present invention,wafer electropolisher 50 preferably includes polishingreceptacle 100, which is divided into sixsections section walls receptacle 100 can be divided into any number of sections by any suitable number of section walls. -
Polishing receptacle 100 andsection walls receptacle 100 andsection walls section wall - As depicted in
FIG. 7B , in the present exemplary embodiment,electrolyte 34 flows into polishingreceptacle 100 throughinlets sections pump 33 suitably pumpselectrolyte 34 from anelectrolyte reservoir 36 to apass filter 32 and into Liquid Mass Flow Controllers (LMFCs) 21, 22 and 23.Pass filter 32 suitably filters contaminants fromelectrolyte 34. In this manner, contaminants are prevented from entering polishingreceptacle 100 and from cloggingLMFCs pass filter 32 suitably removes particles larger than about 0.05 micrometer but smaller than about 0.1 micrometers. It should be recognized, however, that various filtering systems can be used depending on the particular application. Additionally, although filtering contaminants is advantageous,pass filter 32 can be omitted fromwafer polisher 50 without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. -
Electrolyte 34 can include any convenient electroplating fluid, such as phosphoric acid, and the like. In the present exemplary embodiment,electrolyte 34 preferably includes orthophosphoric acid (H2PO4) having a concentration between about 60 percent by weight and about 85 percent by weight, and preferably about 76 percent by weight. Additionally,electrolyte 34 preferably includes orthophosphoric acid having about 1 percent aluminum metal (against weight of the acid). It should be recognized, however, that the concentration and composition ofelectrolyte 34 can vary depending on the particular application. -
Pump 33 can include any convenient hydraulic pump, such as a centrifugal pump, a diaphragm pump, a bellow pump, and the like. Additionally, pump 33 is suitably resistant to acid, corrosion, and contamination. In the present exemplary embodiment, pump 33 includes a diaphragm pump. It should be recognized, as will be depicted and described below in conjunction with alternative embodiments, that two ormore pumps 33 can be used without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. Additionally, it should be recognized thatelectrolyte 34 can be suitably delivered to polishingreceptacle 100 throughinlets pump 34. For example,electrolyte 34 can be maintained at pressure withinelectrolyte reservoir 36. Alternatively, the supply lines betweenelectrolyte reservoir 36 andinlets -
LMFCs LMFCs electrolyte 34 at set flow rates tosections LMFCs electrolyte 34 at flow rates proportionate to the volumes ofsections section 115 is larger in volume thansection 113, then it can be advantageous forLMFC 21 to deliverelectrolyte 34 at a greater flow rate thanLMFC 22. In the present exemplary embodiment,LMFCs electrolyte 34 at a flow rate between about 0.5 liters per minute and about 40 liters per minute. - Additionally, in the present exemplary embodiment, a separate LMFC delivers electrolyte into each
section wafer 31. It should be recognized, however, that any number of LMFCs can be used depending on the particular application. Additionally, as will be described and depicted below in conjunction with alternative embodiments,electrolyte 34 can be delivered into polishingreceptacle 100 frompump 33 without usingLMFCs - In accordance with various aspects of the present invention,
wafer polisher 50 suitably includescathodes sections - Additionally,
cathodes metal layer 121, can accumulate oncathodes cathodes cathodes - Alternatively, a deplating process for
cathodes cathodes wafer 31 is charged negatively, thenwafer 31 is suitably electroplated rather than electropolished. In this manner,wafer 31 can be suitably electroplated with the buildup of metal oncathodes deplate cathodes cathodes - In the present exemplary embodiment,
metal layer 121 includes copper. Accordingly, as described above, during the electropolishing process, some of the copper ions frommetal layer 121 migrate to electroplatecathodes wafer 31 can be suitably electroplated with the buildup of copper oncathodes cathodes cathodes cathodes cathodes cathodes cathodes - In the present exemplary embodiment, a
wafer chuck 29 suitably holds andpositions wafer 31 within polishingreceptacle 100. More particularly,wafer 31 is suitably positioned above the tops ofsection walls electrolyte 34 between the bottom surface ofwafer 31 and the tops ofsection walls wafer 31 is suitably positioned above the tops ofsection walls - After
wafer 31 is suitably positioned within polishingreceptacle 100,cathodes power supplies wafer 31 is electrically connected topower supplies electrolyte 34 flows between the bottom surface ofwafer 31 and the tops ofsection cathodes wafer 31. In response to this negative electric potential atcathodes wafer 31, thus electropolishingwafer 31. However, when the polarity of the circuit is reversed (i.e.,cathodes wafer 31, thus electroplatingwafer 31. - In this manner, selective portions of
wafer 31 can be suitably electropolished and electroplated by controlling the polarity ofcathodes wafer 31 contacted byelectrolyte 34.FIG. 33 depicts the selective electropolishing ofwafer 31 in accordance with various aspects of the present invention. With reference toFIG. 33 ,wafer area 280 has been electropolished,area 284 is being electropolished, andwafer area 282 has not been polished. - With reference again to
FIGS. 7A and 7B , in general, the polishing current density determines the rate at which metal ions migrate to or fromwafer 31. Accordingly, the higher the polishing current density, the greater the electropolishing or electroplating rate. In the present exemplary embodiment, a current density of about 0.1 amperes per decimeter-squared (A/dm2) to about 40 amperes per decimeter-squared (A/dm2), and preferably about 10 amperes per decimeter-squared (A/dm2), can be used. It should be recognized, however, that various current densities can be used depending on the particular application. - Furthermore, power supplies 13, 12 and 11 can apply different current densities to
cathodes power supplies wafer 31 that is covered by the corresponding cathodes. Accordingly, if the surface area ofwafer 31 covered bycathode 3 is larger than that coveredcathode 2,power supply 11 can be set to apply more current thanpower supply 12. In this manner, the rate of electropolishing can be controlled to facilitate a more uniform etching of the surface ofwafer 31. It should be recognized that the same principle can also be used to facilitate a more uniform electroplating of the surface ofwafer 31. - In accordance with another aspect of the present invention, power supplies 13, 12 and 11 can be operated in DC (i.e., direct current) mode. Alternatively, power supplies 13, 12 and 11 can be operated in a variety of pulse modes. For example, with reference to
FIG. 8 , power supplies 13, 12 and 11 can be operated using a bipolar pulse, a modified sine-wave, unipolar pulse, pulse reverse, pulse-on-pulse, duplex pulse, and the like. Power supplies 13, 12 and 11 can also be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, and a combination of constant current mode and constant voltage mode. - With reference again to
FIG. 7B , adrive mechanism 30 suitably rotateswafer 31 about the z-axis. In this manner, a more uniform electropolish can be achieved across the surface ofwafer 31. In the present exemplary embodiment,drive mechanism 30 rotateswafer 31 about the z-axis at approximately 10 revolutions per minute to approximately 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably at about 20 revolutions per minute. - As depicted in
FIG. 7A ,cathodes FIG. 7B , the areas ofwafer 31 abovesections wafer 31 abovesections mechanism 30 suitably oscillateswafer 31 in the x and y directions. Alternatively or in addition to oscillatingwafer 31, as depicted inFIGS. 9A to 9D, polishingreceptacle 100,section walls cathodes wafer 31 aswafer 31 is rotated about the z-axis. -
Electrolyte 34 returns toelectrolyte reservoir 36 throughoutlets sections pressure leak valve 38 is suitably placed between the outlet ofpump 33 andelectrolyte reservoir 36 to allowelectrolyte 34 to leak back toelectrolyte reservoir 36 whenLMFCs heater 42, atemperature sensor 40, and aheater controller 44 suitably control the temperature ofelectrolyte 34 inelectrolyte reservoir 36. In the present exemplary embodiment,wafer polisher 50 andelectrolyte 34 are preferably operated at an operating temperature of about 15 degrees Celsius to about 60 degrees Celsius, and preferably at about 45 degrees Celsius. - With reference to
FIG. 1A ,wafer 31 is suitably electropolished for a period of time (i.e., an electropolishing time period), untilmetal layer 121 is removed frombarrier layer 122, whilemetal layer 121 remains within trenches 125 (as depicted inFIG. 1B ). With reference now toFIG. 7B , the requisite electropolishing time period can be determined by measuring the output voltage and current ofpower supplies barrier layer 122 is typically significantly greater thanmetal layer 121. For example, whenbarrier layer 122 includes titanium, titanium-nitride, tantalum, tantalum-nitride, tungsten, or tungsten-nitride andmetal layer 121 includes copper, the resistance ofbarrier layer 122 is typically about 50 to about 100 times greater than the resistance ofmetal layer 121. Accordingly, the potential measured from edge to center ofwafer 31 after polishingmetal layer 121 away from the non-trench portions ofwafer 31 is larger than that before polishing. As such, as detailed in the table below with reference toFIGS. 7A, 7B and 10, by comparing the output voltages ofpower supplies metal layer 121 abovewafer 31 which have been removed can be suitably determined:TABLE 1 1. If V11 (Voltage of power supply 11) and V12 (Voltage of power supply 12) are small in value, and V13 (Voltage of power supply 13) is large in value, then metal layer 121 onwafer 31 abovecathode 1 has been removed;2. If V11 is small in value, and V12 and V13 are large in value, then metal layer 121 onwafer 31 abovecathode 3 has not beenremoved. Additionally, metal layer 121 abovecathode 2 has beenremoved. However, the condition of metal layer 121 onwafer 31 above cathode 1 is unknown. Therefore, the followingadditional conditions can be consulted to determine the condition of metal layer 121 onwafer 31 above cathode 1:a. If V12 and V13 are close to each other in value, then metal layer 121 onwafer 31 abovecathode 1 has not beenremoved; or b. If V12 and V13 are apart each other in value, then metal layer 121 on wafer 31 abovecathode 1 has been removed;3. If V11, V12 and V13 are large in value, then metal layer 121on wafer 31 abovecathode 3 has been removed. However, thecondition of metal layer 121 onwafer 31 abovecathodes is unknown. Therefore, the following additional conditions can be consulted to determine the condition of metal layer 121 onwafer 31 above cathodes 2 and 1:a. If V11, V12, V13 are apart from each other in value, then metal layer 121 onwafer 31 abovecathode 2 andcathode 1 have been removed;b. If V11 and V12 are apart each other in value, and V12 and V13 are close each other in value, then metal layer 121on wafer 31 abovecathode 2 has been removed. Additionally,metal layer 121 onwafer 31 abovecathode 1 has not beenremoved; c. If V11 and V12 are close each other in value, and V12 and V13 are apart each other in value, then metal layer 121on wafer 31 above cathode has not been removed.Additionally, metal layer 121 onwafer 31 abovecathode 1 has been removed; or d. If V12 and V13 are close to V11 in value, then metal layer 121 on wafer 31 abovecathode removed.
In the table described above, V11, V12 and V13 were described as being large and/or small. It should be recognized, however, that the terms large and small are relative and not meant to relate to any particular voltages. For example, when V11 and V12 are described above as being small, V11 and V12 are small in comparison to V13. As alluded to above, V11 and V12 could be as much as about 50 to about 100 times smaller than V13. - In this manner, by referring to the above table, the areas of
wafer 31, which require additional electropolishing, can be suitably determined. As will be described later in conjunction with an alternative embodiment of the present invention, monitors can be suitably configured to measure the voltage and current provided by each one ofpower supplies wafer 31. It should be recognized that the control system described above can be integrated into an appropriate computer system, which can be a component of a wafer electropolishing tool, an example of which is described below. - As described above, power supplies 13, 12 and 11 can be operated in DC mode or in a variety of pulse modes. Additionally, they can be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these two modes. In
FIG. 55 , a graph is shown depicting the relationship between current and voltage during electropolishing using a pulsed power supply. InFIG. 56 , a graph is shown depicting the relationship between current and voltage during electropolishing using a DC power supply. - In both
FIGS. 55 and 56 , three regions are depicted. These regions are characterized by different electropolishing rates (the rate at which the metal layer is removed) and different wafer surface profiles. In the region between points A and B (the etching region), the electropolishing rate is slower than the other two regions. In this region, a rough surface can result on the wafer, similar to the results obtained from a chemical etching process. In the region between C and D (the over-voltage polishing region), the electropolishing rate is faster than the other two regions. In this region, a rough surface can result on the wafer. In the region between points B and C (the polishing region), the electropolishing rate is faster than the etching region but slower than the over-voltage polishing region. In this region, a fine surface can result on the wafer. - Accordingly, the voltage and current of the power supply can be varied to control the electropolishing process. For example, when the metal layer to be removed is thick, the power supply can be maintained in the over-voltage polishing region to remove a greater amount of the metal layer. Once an initial layer is removed, the power supply can be maintained in the polishing region to obtain a smoother surface on the wafer. The power supply can then be maintained in the etching region to slow the rate of electropolishing. As described above, the current and voltage can be monitored to determine when to stop electropolishing (i.e., determining the end point). This end-point determination can be performed in all three regions depicted in
FIGS. 55 and 56 . But performing end-point detection in the etching region has the advantage that a small amount of the metal layer is removed in this region. - More particularly, when using a DC power supply in a constant voltage mode, the polishing voltage V can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Vpolishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Vmonitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I). R01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is reduced from Vpolishing to Vmonitor. R02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is increased from Vmonitor to Vpolishing. - Thus, the applied voltage can be switched between Vmonitor and Vpolishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed (i.e.,
recess 127 depicted inFIG. 1B is reduced or eliminated) surface on the wafer. By way of example, assume that a wafer is being electropolished. As such, Vpolishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer. During this time, the electropolishing resistance R is monitored. As described above, as the metal layer is removed from the wafer, the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed. As described above, the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R. When the electropolishing resistance R rises above the preset resistance R01, then the applied voltage V is reduced to Vmonitor. As described above, Vmonitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer. By continuing to monitor the electropolishing resistance R, patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions. If electropolishing resistance R falls below R02, then the applied voltage V is increased to Vpolishing. By adjusting R01 and R02, the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer. - When using a DC power supply in a constant current mode, the polishing current I can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Ipolishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Imonitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I). R01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is reduced from Ipolishing to Imonitor. R02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is increased from Imonitor to Ipolishing. - Thus, the applied current can be switched between Imonitor and Ipolishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer. By way of example, assume that a wafer is being electropolished. As such, Ipolishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer. During this time, the electropolishing resistance R is monitored. As described above, as the metal layer is removed from the wafer, the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed. As described above, the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R. When the electropolishing resistance R rises above the preset resistance R01, then the applied current I is reduced to Imonitor. As described above, Imonitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer. By continuing to monitor the electropolishing resistance R, patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions. If electropolishing resistance R falls below R02, then the applied current I is increased to Ipolishing. By adjusting R01 and R02, the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- When using a pulsed power supply in a constant voltage mode (meaning that the height of each pulse is approximately the same) with a constant duty cycle, the polishing voltage V can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Vpolishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Vmonitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high. R01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is reduced from Vpolishing to Vmonitor. R02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied voltage is increased from Vmonitor to Vpolishing. - Thus, the applied voltage can be switched between Vmonitor and Vpolishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer. By way of example, assume that a wafer is being electropolished. As such, Vpolishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer. During this time, the electropolishing resistance R is monitored. As described above, as the metal layer is removed from the wafer, the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed. As described above, the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R. When the electropolishing resistance R rises above the preset resistance R01, then the applied voltage V is reduced to Vmonitor. As described above, Vmonitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer. By continuing to monitor the electropolishing resistance R, patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions. If electropolishing resistance R falls below R02, then the applied voltage V is increased to Vpolishing. By adjusting R01 and R02, the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- When using a pulse power supply in a constant current mode with a constant duty cycle, the polishing current I can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Ipolishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Imonitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high. R01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is reduced from Ipolishing to Imonitor.R02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied current is increased from Imonitor to Ipolishing. - Thus, the applied current can be switched between Imonitor and Ipolishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer. By way of example, assume that a wafer is being electropolished. As such, Ipolishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer. During this time, the electropolishing resistance R is monitored. As described above, as the metal layer is removed from the wafer, the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed. As described above, the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R. When the electropolishing resistance R rises above the preset resistance R01, then the applied current I is reduced to Imonitor. As described above, Imonitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer. By continuing to monitor the electropolishing resistance R, patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions. If electropolishing resistance R falls below R02, then the applied current I is increased to Ipolishing. By adjusting R01 and R02, the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- When using a pulsed power supply in a constant voltage mode with variable duty cycle, the applied duty cycle D can be controlled using the following formula:
Where Dpolishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process. In one embodiment, Dpolishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent. Dmonitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection. In one embodiment, Dmonitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent. The frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz. The value of R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high. R01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is reduced from Dpolishing to Dmonitor. R02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is increased from Dmonitor to Dpolishing. - Thus, the applied duty cycle D can be switched between Dmonitor and Dpolishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer. By way of example, assume that a wafer is being electropolished. As such, Dpolishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer. During this time, the electropolishing resistance R is monitored. As described above, as the metal layer is removed from the wafer, the electropolishing resistance R increases. More particularly, as the metal layer is removed, the barrier layer underneath the metal layer becomes exposed. As described above, the barrier layer typically has a significantly greater electrical resistance than the metal layer. Consequently, as more of the barrier layer is exposed, the more the increase in electropolishing resistance R. When the electropolishing resistance R rises above the preset resistance R01, then the applied duty cycle D is reduced to Dmonitor. As described above, Dmonitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer. By continuing to monitor the electropolishing resistance R, patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions. If electropolishing resistance R falls below R02, then the applied duty cycle D is increased to Dpolishing. By adjusting R01 and R02, the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- When using a pulsed power supply in a constant current mode with variable duty cycle, the applied duty cycle D can be controlled using the following formula:
Where Dpolishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process. In one embodiment, Dpolishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent. Dmonitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection. In one embodiment, Dmonitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent. The frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz. The value of R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high. R01 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is reduced from Dpolishing to Dmonitor. R02 is the predetermined resistance at which the applied duty cycle D is increased from Dmonitor to Dpolishing. - Thus, the applied duty cycle D can be switched between Dmonitor and Dpolishing to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer. By way of example, assume that a wafer is being electropolished. As such, Dpolishing is applied to remove the metal layer from the wafer. During this time, the electropolishing resistance R is monitored. As described above, as the metal layer is removed from the wafer, the electropolishing resistance R increases. When the electropolishing resistance R rises above the preset resistance R01, then the applied duty cycle D is reduced to Dmonitor. As described above, Dmonitor is sufficiently low that the electropolishing resistance R can be monitored while removing only a small amount of the metal layer from the wafer. By continuing to monitor the electropolishing resistance R, patches or sections of metal layers remaining on the wafer can be detected. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R will decrease in these regions. If electropolishing resistance R falls below R02, then the applied duty cycle D is increased to Dpolishing. By adjusting R01 and R02, the electropolishing process can be tuned to produce a smooth, planar, and non-recessed surface on the wafer.
- In the description above, the electropolishing voltage, current, or duty cycle have been described as being varied between two discrete levels (i.e., a polishing and a monitoring level). It should be recognized, however, that the electropolishing voltage, current, or duty cycle can be varied adaptively within a continuum.
- More particularly, when using a DC power supply in a constant voltage mode, the polishing voltage V can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Vpolishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Vmonitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I). Rmax is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1B . Rmin is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1A . N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like. - Thus, as the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmax, the applied voltage V approaches Vmonitor. As the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmin, the applied voltage V approaches Vpolishing. In this manner, the applied voltage V is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- When using a DC power supply in a constant current mode, the polishing current I can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Ipolishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Imonitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I). Rmax is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1B . Rmin is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1A . N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like. - Thus, as the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmax, the applied current I approaches Imonitor. As the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmin, the applied current I approaches Ipolishing. In this manner, the applied current I is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- When using a pulsed power supply in a constant voltage mode with a constant duty cycle, the polishing voltage V can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Vpolishing is the voltage applied during normal electropolishing, such as the voltages in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Vmonitor is the voltage applied during end-point detection, such as the voltages in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high. Rmax is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1B . Rmin is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1A . N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like. - Thus, as the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmax, the applied voltage V approaches Vmonitor. As the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmin, the applied voltage V approaches Vpolishing. In this manner, the applied voltage V is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- When using a pulsed power supply in a constant current mode with a constant duty cycle, the polishing current I can be controlled using the following formula:
Where, Ipolishing is the current applied during normal electropolishing, such as the currents in the polishing regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . Imonitor is the current applied during end-point detection, such as the currents in the etching regions depicted inFIGS. 55 and 56 . R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high. Rmax is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1B . Rmin is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1A . N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like. - Thus, as the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmax, the applied current I approaches Imonitor. As the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmin, the applied current I approaches Ipolishing. In this manner, the applied current I is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- When using a pulsed power supply in a constant voltage mode with variable duty cycle, the applied duty cycle D can be controlled using the following formula:
Where Dpolishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process. In one embodiment, Dpolishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent. Dmonitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection. In one embodiment, Dmonitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent. The frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz. R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high. Rmax is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1B . Rmin is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1A . N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like. - Thus, as the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmax, the applied duty cycle D approaches Dmonitor. As the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmin, the applied duty cycle D approaches Dpolishing. In this manner, the applied duty cycle D is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- When using a pulsed power supply in a constant current mode with variable duty cycle, the applied duty cycle D can be controlled using the following formula:
Where Dpolishing is the duty cycle used during the electropolishing process. In one embodiment, Dpolishing is in the range between about 10 percent to about 100 percent, and preferably about 80 percent. Dmonitor is the duty cycle used during end-point detection. In one embodiment, Dmonitor is in the range between about 0.1 percent to about 10 percent, and preferably about 1 percent. The frequency of the pulse can be in the range of about 1 Herz to about 100 kiloHerz, and preferably about 100 Herz. R is the electrical resistance monitored during end-point detection. As described above, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by monitoring the applied voltage V and current I. More particularly, the electropolishing resistance R can be determined by dividing the applied voltage by the applied current (i.e., V/I), where the applied voltage V is measured when the pulse is on or high. Rmax is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer has been removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1B . Rmin is the predetermined resistance at which the metal layer cover the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1A . N is a scaling factor that can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process. As such, it can be any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fraction, and the like. - Thus, as the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmax, the applied duty cycle D approaches Dmonitor. As the electropolishing resistance R approaches Rmin, the applied duty cycle D approaches Dpolishing. In this manner, the applied duty cycle D is adaptively controlled based on the electropolishing resistance R.
- In one exemplary embodiment, where the electrolyte used for the electropolishing process is 85% (wt.) H2PO4, Vpolishing can be in the range of about 0.5 volts to about 3 volts. Vmonitor can be in the range of about 0.1 volts to about 0.5 volts. Ipolishing can be in the range of about 5 mA/cm2 to about 50 mA/cm2. Imonitor can be in the range of about 0.01 mA/cm2 to about 5 mA/cm2. For pulsed power supplies, the peak-to-peak voltage can be about 1 volt and the peak-to-peak current density can be about 30 mA/cm2. It should be recognized, however, that these values are only exemplary and that they can vary depending on the particular application.
- As described above, the appropriate electropolishing time period can be determined by measuring changes in the electropolishing resistance R. More particularly, during electropolishing where electrical power is applied through an electrode in contact with the edges of the wafer, the electropolishing resistance R can be expressed as follows:
Where, R, U, and I are the electropolishing resistance, voltage, and current, respectively. Rinterface is the resistance between the interface of the wafer and the electrolyte. RML is the resistance of the metal film from the edge of the wafer in contact with the electrode (i.e., the electrode that provides the electrical charge to the wafer) to the area of the wafer in contact with the electrolyte. Rbarrier is the resistance of the barrier layer from the edge of the wafer in contact with the electrode to the area of the wafer in contact with the electrolyte. Rcontact is the resistance where the wafer contacts the electrode. Rcathode is the resistance between the cathode and the electrolyte. - With reference to
FIG. 57 , a graph is shown depicting changes in electropolishing resistance, R over time. The electropolishing process begins at about point A when the metal layer begins to be removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1A . At about point C, the metal layer as be removed from the wafer surface, such as depicted inFIG. 1B . Thus, the electropolishing process is performed between endpoints A and B. The amount and profile of the metal layer remaining on the wafer surface being determined by where along the curve between these two endpoints the electropolishing process is stopped. It should be recognized, however, that the shape of the graph depicted inFIG. 57 can vary depending on the particular application. - With reference to equation (1) above, during the electropolishing process, changes in RML, Rbarrier, Rcontact, and Rcathode can be assumed to be relatively constant compared to the changes in Rinterface. Thus, when the derivative of equation (1) is taken with respect to time, the following results:
d(U/I)/dt=dR/dt=dR interface /dt (2)
Thus equation (2) would represent tangent lines along the curve depicted inFIG. 8 . But as can be seen inFIG. 57 , an inflection point exists at point B. Thus, based solely on equation (2), a point lying between points A and B can not be distinguished from a point lying between points B and C. But a second derivative of equation (1) can be taken to distinguish between points lying between points A and B from points lying between points B and C. In this manner, the amount and profile of the metal layer remaining on the wafer surface can be determined by stopping the electropolishing process at the desired endpoint along the curve depicted inFIG. 57 . - For example, the electropolishing process can be stopped between points A and B by using the following formula to determine the endpoint:
Where, C0 is a predetermined constant at which the electropolishing process is to be stopped. - The electropolishing process can be stopped at point B by using the following formula to determine the endpoint:
Where, Cmaximum is a predetermined constant at which the electropolishing process is to be stopped. - The electropolishing process can be stopped between points B and C by using the following formula to determine the endpoint:
Where, C1 is a predetermined constant at which the electropolishing process is to be stopped. - The electropolishing process can be stopped entirely (for example, by turning off the power supply). Alternatively, as described above, the electropolishing rate can be reduced to continue to monitor the electropolishing resistance R. If the electropolishing resistance R sufficiently decreases (for example, as in unpolished patches or areas of the wafer), then the electropolishing rate can be increased.
- The values of C0, Cmaximum, and C1 can be determined experimentally. For example, wafers can be processed at various C0 settings to determine the value that produces the desired wafer surface profile. Once this value is determined, they can be used to process additional wafers.
- In one exemplary embodiment, C0 can range between about 0.01 ohms/second to about 100 ohms/second. Cmaximum can range between about 10 ohms/second to about 100 ohms/second. C1 can range between about 0.01 ohm/second to about 100 ohms/second. It should be recognized, however, that these values can vary depending on the particular application.
- As described above,
power supply 200 can be operated in DC mode or in a variety of pulse modes. Additionally, it can be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Further, when a pulsed power supply is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied. - When using a DC or a pulsed power supply in a constant voltage mode, the electropolishing endpoint can be determined using the following formula:
dR/dt=U(−1/I 2)(dI/dt)
d 2 R/dt 2 =U(2/I 3)(dI/dt)2 +U(−1/I 2) (d 2 I/dt 2) (6)
Where, U is the applied voltage and I is the applied current. When a pulsed power supply is used, the applied current I is measured when the pulse is on or high. - When using a DC or a pulsed power supply in a constant current mode, the electropolishing endpoint can be determined using the following formula:
dR/dt=(dU/dt)/I
d 2 R/dt 2=(d 2 U/dt 2)/I (7)
Where, U is the applied voltage and I is the applied current. When a pulsed power supply is used, the applied voltage U is measured when the pulse is on or high. - Thus, when the values for dR/dt and d2R/dt2 using formulas (6) or (7) meet the conditions setforth in equations (3), (4), or (5), the electropolishing process is stopped. The electropolishing process can be stopped entirely (for example, by turning off the power supply). Alternatively, as described above, the electropolishing rate can be reduced to continue to monitor the electropolishing resistance R. If the electropolishing resistance R sufficiently decreases (for example, as in unpolished patches or areas of the wafer), then the electropolishing rate can be increased. Additionally, when a pulsed power supply is used, the duty cycle can be altered to alter the electropolishing rate.
- In the description above, the electropolishing resistance R was described as increasing when the metal layer is removed to expose the barrier layer. As alluded to earlier, in some applications, the barrier layer can be omitted from the wafer. When the wafer does not include a barrier layer, the dielectric layer is exposed when the metal layer is removed. Dielectric layers typically have a greater electrical resistance characteristic than the metal layer. Accordingly, the electropolishing resistance R will increase when the metal layer is removed to expose the dielectric layer.
- Additionally, it should be appreciated, however, that various techniques can be used to determine the appropriate electropolishing time period. For example, as will be described in greater detail below in conjunction with an alternative embodiment, sensors can be used to measure the thickness of metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) on wafer 31 (FIG. 1A andFIG. 7B ). - Alternatively, with reference to
FIG. 53 , an end-point detector system can be suitably employed to determine the appropriate electropolishing time period. In accordance with an exemplary embodiment, the measured electrical resistance from edge to edge of wafer 31 (FIG. 1A ) is monitored using appropriate measurement tools. As depicted inFIG. 53 , as the surface area of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) on wafer 31 (FIG. 1A ) is reduced due to electropolishing, the electrical resistance measured from edge to edge of wafer 31 (FIG. 1A ) increases. Accordingly, the appropriate time at which to stop electropolishing is preferably around the time at which the measured electrical resistance from edge to edge ofwafer 31 changes rapidly. With specific reference toFIG. 53 , this would be at or near t0 and t1. The region beyond t1 is called the over-polishing region, meaning that wafer 31 (FIG. 1B ) has been polished such that the level of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1B ) within trench 125 (FIG. 1B ) extends below the level of barrier layer 122 (FIG. 1B ). The region before t0 is called the under-polishing region, meaning that metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) has not been entirely removed from dielectric layer 122 (FIG. 1A ) on gates 126 (FIG. 1A ). The resistance signal can be sent to a computer, which can then send the appropriate signal to stop the polishing process. - With reference to
FIGS. 7A and 7B , using the exemplary embodiment of the present invention described above, the following process steps can be employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 13; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 23 only, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovecathode 1 to electropolish metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) abovecathode 1; - Step 3: Turn off
power supply 13 and turn off LMFC 23, when the thickness of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness; - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
cathode 2, usingLMFC 22 andpower supply 12; and - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
cathode 3 , usingLMFC 21 andpower supply 11.
In addition to the above described electropolishing sequence ofcathode 1, thencathode 2, and thencathode 3, the electropolishing sequence can also be as follows:
- Step 1: Turn on
- 1)
cathode 3, thencathode 2, and thencathode 1; - 2)
cathode 2, thencathode 1, and thencathode 3; - 3)
cathode 2, thencathode 3, and thencathode 1; - 4)
cathode 3, thencathode 1, and thencathode 2; or - 5)
cathode 1, thencathode 3, and thencathode 2. - By selectively polishing portions of
wafer 31, metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) can be electropolished more uniformly fromwafer 31, even whenwafer 31 is a large diameter wafer. For example, the present invention can be used with awafer 31 having a diameter of 300 millimeters or greater. In the present context, a uniform electropolish refers toelectropolishing wafer 31 such thatmetal layer 121 is removed to an approximately even thickness across substantially all of the surface area ofwafer 31. In general, in conventional electropolishing systems, the greater the diameter ofwafer 31, the greater the nonuniformity of the electropolish. For example, the areas ofwafer 31 near the center can be overpolished while the areas ofwafer 31 near the edges ofwafer 31 can be underpolished. This can be due in part to the varying charge densities applied acrosswafer 31 by conventional electropolishing systems. - In addition to selectively polishing portions of
wafer 31, using the exemplary embodiment of the present invention described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 substantially at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on all
power supplies power supply wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFCs electrolyte 34 from each LMFC 21, 22 and 23 can be suitably set proportionate to the surface area ofwafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supplies FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness. Also, power supplies 11, 12 and 13 can be turned off at different times to adjust the thickness uniformity of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ).
In this manner, the rate of removal ofmetal layer 121 from different portions ofwafer 31 can be suitably controlled to more uniformlyelectropolish metal layer 121 onwafer 31.
- Step 1: Turn on all
- Having thus described the structure and operation of an exemplary embodiment, an application of the present invention in the context of a damascene process will be described below. It should be recognized, however, that such description is not intended as a limitation on the use or applicability of the present invention, but is instead provided to enable a full and complete description of the present exemplary embodiment.
- With reference again to
FIG. 1A , in general, whenmetal layer 121 is suitably formed onwafer 31, recesses 127 can form overtrenches 125. As depicted inFIG. 1A , even after electropolishing, recesses 127 can remain in themetal layer 121 formed withintrenches 125. This can be due in part to the original uneven topology ofmetal layer 121 depicted inFIG. 1A . Additionally, overpolishing can contribute to the formation ofrecesses 127 withintrenches 125. The existence ofrecesses 127 can adversely affect the performance of the semiconductor device. Accordingly, recesses 127 having arecess depth 128 greater than about 500 Angstroms are typically considered undesirable. It should be recognized, however, that the amount ofrecess depth 128, which is acceptable, can vary depending on the particular application. For example, for a high precision semiconductor device, arecess depth 128 of no more than a few Angstroms can be acceptable. However, for a low cost semiconductor device, arecess depth 128 greater than 500 Angstroms can be acceptable. - In accordance with one aspect of the present invention, the electropolishing time period can be suitably controlled to prevent the formation of
recesses 127 withrecess depth 128 of greater than about 500 Angstroms. However, this can increase processing cost and reduce processing throughput. Accordingly, in accordance with another aspect of the present invention, an electropolishing and electroplating process can be suitably combined with a chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) process to removerecesses 127. In general, CMP processes can suitably produce a planar surface onwafer 31 withrecesses 127 having arecess depth 128 between about 100 and about 500 Angstroms. - With reference to
FIG. 1B , as described above,metal layer 121 is suitably electropolished frombarrier layer 122 formed onmesas 126. With reference toFIG. 1C ,wafer 31 then undergoes a replating process to replate a sufficient amount of metal to fix recesses 127 (FIG. 1B ), meaning that metal is plated ontometal layer 121, which is formed in trenches 125 (FIG. 1B ), without replating overbarrier layer 122 onmesas 126. With reference toFIG. 7B , as alluded to earlier,wafer 31 can be suitably replated by reversing the polarity ofpower supplies wafer 31 can be suitably replated without necessarily having to transferwafer 31 to another station. - Next, in accordance with another aspect of the present invention, the
metal layer 123 withintrenches 125, which has been replated, is suitably planarized, and thebarrier layer 122 is suitably removed. In the present exemplary embodiment,wafer 31 is preferably planarized using a CMP process. By having removed the majority ofmetal layer 123 using the above described electropolishing process, only a small amount ofmetal layer 123 now needs to be removed using CMP, which reduces overall processing time and cost. - With reference now to
FIGS. 3A to 3C, a wafer-processing tool 301, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. In an exemplary embodiment of the present invention,wafer processing tool 301 preferably includes electroplating/electropolishing cells cells CMP cell 324,wafer cassette 320, and arobot 322. -
Robot 322 begins by transferring a wafer fromwafer cassette 320 to any one of electroplating/electropolishing cells FIG. 1A ). Next, the wafer is suitably electropolished to removemetal layer 121 from barrier layer 122 (FIG. 1B ). Next, the wafer is suitably replated to fix recesses 127 (FIGS. 1B and 1C ).Robot 322 then transfers the wafer to any one of cleaningcells robot 322 transfers the wafer toCMP cell 324, where themetal layer 121 is planarized andbarrier layer 122 is removed (FIG. 1D ).Robot 322 then transfers the wafer to any one of cleaningcells robot 322 transfers the wafer towafer cassette 320 and begins again with another wafer. - It should be recognized, however, that various modifications can be made to the configuration of
wafer processing tool 301 without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. For example, the initial electroplating and electropolishing of the wafer can be performed in separate cells. In general, different electrolytes are used for electroplating and electropolishing. For electroplating, a sulfuric acid is typically used. For electropolishing, a phosphoric acid is typically used. Although sulfuric acid can be used for electropolishing, the resulting surface can be non-uniform. Similarly, although phosphoric acid can be used for electroplating, the resulting surface can be non-uniform. A non-uniform surface can be acceptable for the replating process described above. However, a non-uniform surface can be unacceptable for the initial plating ofmetal layer 121. Accordingly, when a uniform surface is preferred, the electroplating and electropolishing of the wafer can be performed in separate cells with different chemistries. Alternatively, when electroplating and electropolishing is performed in the same cell, the chemistry of the electrolyte solution within the cell can be varied. For example, for the replating process described above, a sulfuric acid solution can be added to facilitate a better electroplating process. - With reference to
FIG. 2 , the processing steps performed bywafer processing tool 301 are set forth in a flow chart format. It should be recognized, however, that various modifications can be made to the steps depicted in the flow chart inFIG. 2 . For example, the wafers may be queued after the re-plating step, then rinsed and cleaned in a batch process. - With reference to
FIGS. 4A to 4D, one alternative to polishingwafer 31 using CMP after replatingwafer 31 is to etchmetal layer 121 andbarrier layer 122 fromwafer 31 using any convenient etching process. Accordingly, with reference toFIGS. 6A to 6C, wafer-processing tool 301 can be modified to include anetching cell 326. Similarly, with reference toFIG. 5 , the processing steps performed bywafer processing tool 301 can be modified to include an etching step. - In the following description and associated drawing figures, various alternative embodiments in accordance with various aspects of the present invention will be described and depicted. It should be recognized, however, that these alternative embodiments are not intended to demonstrate all of the various modifications, which can be made to the present invention. Rather, these alternative embodiments are provided to demonstrate only some of the many modifications which are possible without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention.
- With reference now to
FIGS. 1A and 1B , an alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 11A and 11B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B except that LMFCs 21, 22 and 23 (FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced byLMFC 55 andvalves valves
Flow rate set ofLMFC 55=F.R.3×f(valve 51)+
F.R. 2×f(valve 52)+
F.R. 1×f(valve 53)
Where, F.R. 3 is the set point of flow rate toinlet 4, F.R. 2 is the set point of flow rate toinlet 6, F.R. 3 is the set point of flow rate toinlet 8, and f (valve #) is a valve status function defined as follows:
f(valve #)=1, when valve # is turned on;
0, when valve # is turned off.
As alluded to above, the flow rates can be set proportionate to the volumes ofsection - With reference now to
FIGS. 12A and 12B , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 12A and 12B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B except that LMFCs 21, 22 and 23 (FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced by threepumps 33 and on/offvalves electrolyte 34 into polishingreceptacle 100 throughinlets pumps 33 and one on/offvalve - With reference now to
FIGS. 13A and 13B , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. In contrast to the exemplary embodiment shown inFIGS. 7A and 7B , in the present alternative embodiment, a cathode is preferably disposed in every section of polishingreceptacle 100 exceptsection 132. For example, additional cathode 154 is suitably disposed betweensection walls valves electrolyte reservoir 36 and the outlets of LMFCs 21, 22, 23 and 24. Accordingly, when an on/offvalve electrolyte 34 can suitably flow back intoelectrolyte reservoir 36 through the open valve from polishingreceptacle 100 . - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 14; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 24 andopen valves 81,82, and 83. Turn off LMFCs 21, 22, and 23 andclose valve 84, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovecathode 1.Electrolyte 34 then returns to electrolytereservoir 36 throughoutlet 132 suitably formed insection 130.Electrolyte 34 also returns to electrolytereservoir 34 throughopen valves 81, 82 and 83; - Step 3: When the thickness of metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 14 and turn off LMFC 24; - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 2 (Turn on
LMFC 23.Open valves power supply 13. Turn off LMFCs 21, 22 and 24. Close valve 83. Turnoff power supplies 11, 12 and 14); - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 3 (Turn on
LMFC 22.Open valves 81, 83 and 84. Turn onpower supply 12. Turn off LMFCs 21, 23 and 24.Close valve 82. Turn offpower supplies - Step 6: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 4 (Turn on
LMFC 21.Open valves power supply 11. Turn off LMFCs 22, 23 and 24. Close valve 81. Turn offpower supplies
- Step 1: Turn on
- It should be recognized that rather than polishing from periphery of the wafer to center of the wafer, polishing also can be performed from center to periphery, or can be performed by randomly choosing a cathode sequence.
- In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supplies power supply wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode. - Step 2: Turn on
LMFCs valves electrolyte 34 fromLMFCs wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supplies FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness. Also, power supplies 11, 12, 13 and 14 can be turned off at different times to adjust the thickness uniformity of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ).
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 14A and 14B , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 14A and 14B is similar to that ofFIGS. 13A and 13B except that on/offvalves 81, 82, 83 and 84 (FIGS. 13A and 13B ) have been removed. Accordingly,electrolyte 34 returns toelectrolyte reservoir 36 only throughsection 130. - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 14 to output negative potential to electrode 1 (cathode 1). Turn onpower supplies electrode anodes - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 24 only and turn off LMFCs 21 22, and 23.Wafer 31 is steeped inelectrolyte 34, however, only the portion ofwafer 31 abovecathode 1 contacts electrolyte 34 fromLMFC 24 and negative potential fromcathode 1. Therefore, only the portion of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) onwafer 31 abovecathode 1 is suitably electropolished;. - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set-value or thickness, turn offpower supply 14 and turn off LMFC 24; - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 2 (Turn on
power supply 13 to output negative potential tocathode 2 , andpower supplies anodes LMFC 23 and turn off LMFCs 21, 22 and 24 ); - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 3 (Turn on
power supply 12 to output negative potential tocathode 3. Turn onpower supplies anodes LMFC 22 and turn off LMFCs 21, 23 and 24); and - Step 6: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 4 (Turn on power supply to output negative potential to
cathode 4. Turn onpower supplies anodes LMFC 21 and turn off LMFCs 22, 23 and 24).
- Step 1: Turn on
- In the above selective polishing process, instead of polishing from the center of
wafer 31 to the periphery ofwafer 31, the polishing also can be performed from the periphery to the center, or can be performed randomly depending on the cathode sequence. - In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supplies power supply wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFCs electrolyte 34 fromLMFCs wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supplies FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness. Also, power supplies 11, 12, 13 and 14 can be turned off at different times to adjust the thickness uniformity of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ).
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIG. 15 , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 15 is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B except that adiffuser ring 112 has been added above each cathode. In accordance with one aspect of the present invention,diffuser ring 112 preferably facilitates a more uniform flow ofelectrolyte 34 alongsection walls FIG. 1A ) can be suitably electropolished more uniformly fromwafer 31. - Additionally,
diffuser ring 112 can be suitably formed using any convenient method. For example,diffuser ring 112 can be machined to have a number of holes. Alternatively,diffuser ring 112 can include any suitable porous material having porosity preferably in the range of about 10% to about 90%. Additionally, in the present alternative embodiment,diffuser ring 112 is preferably formed from anti-acid, anti-corrosion, particle and contamination free materials. - With reference now to
FIGS. 16A and 16B , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 16A and 16B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B except thatcharge accumulator meters power supplies charge accumulator meters power supply - With reference now to
FIGS. 17A and 17B , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 17A and 17B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B except that polishingreceptacle 100 suitably includes a plurality ofinlets sections electrolyte 34. More particularly, in the present alternative embodiment,electrolyte 34 is preferably delivered intosection 113 throughfeed line 170 andinlets Electrolyte 34 is preferably delivered intosection 115 throughelectrolyte feed line 173 andinlets electrolyte 34 into plating receptacle 10 using a plurality ofinlets sections - With reference now to
FIGS. 18A and 18B , two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 18A is similar to that ofFIGS. 13A and 13B andFIGS. 14A and 14B except that the height ofsection walls FIG. 18B , the height ofsection walls electrolyte 34 can be further controlled to enhance the electropolishing process. - With reference now to
FIGS. 19A and 19B , two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 19A is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B except that the height ofsection walls FIG. 19B , the height ofsection walls electrolyte 34 can be further controlled to enhance the electropolishing process. - With reference now to
FIGS. 20A and 20B , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 20A and 20B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B , except thatsection walls electrolyte 34. As shown inFIG. 20B ,section walls electrolyte 34 flows toward the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection walls - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 13; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 23 only and movesection wall 109 close towafer 31, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection wall 109. In this manner, metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) on the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection wall 109 is suitably electropolished; - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 13, turn off LMFC 23, and movesection wall 109 to a lower position; - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
section walls LMFC 22,section walls power supply 12; and - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
section walls LMFC 21,section walls power supply 11.
- Step 1: Turn on
- In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supplies power supply wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode. - Step 2: Turn on
LMFCs section wafer 31. As also described earlier, the flow rate ofelectrolyte 34 fromLMFCs wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supplies FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness. Also, power supplies 11, 12 and 13 can be turned off at different times to adjust the thickness uniformity of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ).
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 21A and 21B , two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 21A is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B , except that, in the present alternative embodiment,cathodes section walls FIG. 21B is similar toFIGS. 13A and 13B , except that, in the present alternative embodiment,cathodes section walls FIGS. 21A and 21B , any number of sections can be used without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. - Additionally, as described in the table below, the cathodes can be connected to one or more power supplies and the sections can be connected to one or more LMFCs in various combinations:
TABLE 2 Various ways to connect Various ways to connect Combination the cathodes to one or one or more sectors to No. more power supplies one or more LMFCs 1 Each cathode is connected Each sector is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 2 Each cathode is connected Sectors on the same to an independent power radius are connected supply to an independent LMFC 3 Each cathode is connected All sectors are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 4 Cathodes on the same Each sector is connected radius are connected to to an independent LMFC an independent power supply 5 Cathodes on the same Sectors on the same radius are connected radius are connected to an independent to an independent power supply LMFC 6 Cathodes on the same radius All sectors are connected are connected to an to an independent LMFC independent power supply 7 All cathodes are connected Each sector is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 8 All cathodes are connected Sectors on the same to an independent power radius are connected supply to an independent LMFC 9 All cathodes are connected All sectors are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply - In the above table, the operation of
combination numbers combination numbers - With reference now to
FIGS. 22A and 22B , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 22A and 22B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B , except thatcathodes FIGS. 7A and 7B ) andsection walls FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced by a plurality of rod-type cathodes 501 suitably disposed within a plurality oftubes 503. In the present alternative embodiment, electrolyte 34 (FIG. 7B ) is preferably delivered toelectropolishing receptacle 100 through plurality oftubes 503, contacts the surface ofwafer 31, then drains out ofelectropolishing receptacle 100 through a plurality of drainage holes 500. As depicted inFIG. 22A , in the present alternative embodiment,cathodes 503, plurality oftubes 503, and plurality ofdrainage holes 500 are preferably arranged in a circular pattern. However, with reference toFIGS. 23A to 23C,cathodes 501, plurality oftubes 503, and plurality ofdrainage holes 500 can also be configured in various other patterns, such as a triangle (FIG. 23A ), a square (FIG. 23B ), an ellipse (FIG. 23C ), and the like. - Additionally, as described in the table below,
cathodes 501 and plurality oftubes 503 can be connected topower supplies FIG. 7B ) andLMFCs FIG. 7B ), respectively, in various combinations:TABLE 3 Various ways to connect Various ways to connect Combination cathodes 501 to one or plurality of tubes 503No. more power supplies to one or more LMFCs 1 Each cathode is connected Each tube is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 2 Each cathode is connected Tubes on the same radius to an independent power are connected to an supply independent LMFC 3 Each cathode is connected All tubes are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 4 Cathodes on the same Each tube is connected radius are connected to to an independent LMFC an independent power supply 5 Cathodes on the same radius Tubes on the same radius are connected to an are connected to an independent power supply independent LMFC 6 Cathodes on the same radius All tubes are connected are connected to an to an independent LMFC independent power supply 7 All cathodes are connected Each tube is connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply 8 All cathodes are connected Tubes on the same radius to an independent power are connected to an supply independent LMFC 9 All cathodes are connected All tubes are connected to an independent power to an independent LMFC supply - In the above table, the operation of
combination numbers combination numbers - With reference now to
FIGS. 24A and 24B , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 24A and 24B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B , except thatcathodes FIGS. 7A and 7B ) andsection walls FIGS. 7A and 7B ) have been replaced withcathode 240,bar 242, andvalves power supply 200. Additionally,valves electrolyte 34 ontowafer 31. Furthermore,valves bar 242 to facilitate a more uniform electropolishing process. - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 200; - Step 2: Turn on
pump 33,LMFC 55, and drivemechanism 30. Turn onvalves electrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovevalves FIG. 1A ) on the portion ofwafer 31 abovevalves - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 200,LMFC 55, andvalves - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves - Step 6: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves - Step 7: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves 210.
- Step 1: Turn on
- During the above described polishing process,
power supply 200 can be operated in DC mode, or in a variety of pulse modes, as shown inFIG. 8 . Also, the power supply can be turned on after turning onpump 33 andvalves - In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 200; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 55 and allvalves electrolyte 34 contacts substantially the entire surface area ofwafer 31; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supply 200 and all valves when the film thickness reaches a set value. Also,valves FIG. 1A ) onwafer 31.
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIG. 25 , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 25 is similar to that ofFIGS. 24A and 24B , except that all valves are disposed onbar 242 at different radii onbar 242 to facilitate a more uniform electropolish. - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
FIG. 24B ); - Step 2: Turn on pump 33 (
FIG. 24B ), LMFC 55 (FIG. 24B ), and drive mechanism 30 (FIG. 24B ). Turn onvalve 218, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovevalve 218. In this manner, metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) on the portion ofwafer 31 abovevalve 218 is electropolished; - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn off power supply 200 (FIG. 24B ), LMFC 55 (FIG. 24B ), andvalves 218; - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valve 204; - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valve 216; - Step 6: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valve 206; and - Step 7: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
- During the above described polishing process, power supply 200 (
FIG. 24B ) can be operated in DC mode, or in a variety of pulse modes, as shown inFIG. 8 . Additionally, the electroplating sequence can be started from the center ofwafer 31 to the edge ofwafer 31 without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. - In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
FIG. 24B ); - Step 2: Turn on LMFC 55 (
FIG. 24B ) and allvalves electrolyte 34 contacts substantially the entire surface area ofwafer 31; and - Step 3: Turn off power supplies 200 (
FIG. 24B ) and all valves when the film thickness reaches a set value. Also,valves FIG. 1A ) on wafer 31 (FIG. 24B ).
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
- With reference now to
FIG. 26 , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 26 is similar to that ofFIG. 25 except that an additional bar has been added to form across-shaped bar 244.Valves FIG. 26 ). Similarly,valves FIG. 26 ). Additionally, as depicted inFIG. 26 , the valves on horizontal portion ofbar 244 are disposed at different radii than the valves on the vertical portion ofbar 244. - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
FIG. 24B ); - Step 2: Turn on pump 33 (
FIG. 24B ), LMFC 55 (FIG. 24B ), and drive mechanism 30 (FIG. 24B ). Turn onvalves electrolyte 34 contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovevalves FIG. 1A ) on the portion ofwafer 31 abovevalves - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn off power supply 200 (FIG. 24B ), LMFC 55 (FIG. 24B ),valves - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves - Step 6: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves - Step 7: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
valves
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
- During the above described polishing process, power supply 200 (
FIG. 24B ) can be operated in DC mode, or in a variety of pulse modes, as shown inFIG. 8 . - In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
FIG. 24B ); - Step 2: Turn on pump 33 (
FIG. 24B ), LMFC 55 (FIG. 24B ), and allvalves electrolyte 34 only contacts substantially the entire surface area ofwafer 31; and - Step 3: Turn off power supply 200 (
FIG. 24B ) and all valves when the thickness of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value. Allvalves FIG. 1A ) on wafer 31 (FIG. 24B ).
- Step 1: Turn on power supply 200 (
- With reference now to
FIGS. 27A , B, and C, three additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 27A is similar to that ofFIGS. 24A and 24B except that, in the present alternative embodiment, three bars are used. The angle between two adjacent bars is preferably about 60°. The embodiment ofFIG. 27B is similar to those ofFIGS. 24A and 24B except that four bars are used. The angle between two adjacent bars is preferably about 45°. The embodiment ofFIG. 27C is similar to those ofFIGS. 24A and 24B except that half of a bar is used. It should be recognized, however, that any number of bars can be used without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. Additionally, the adjacent bars can be set at various angles again without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. - In the alternative embodiments described thus far, the electropolishing sequence can be started from valves close to the periphery of
wafer 31, or started from the center ofwafer 31, or started randomly. Starting from the center ofwafer 31 is preferred since the non-polished metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) (with larger diameter) can be used to conduct current for polishing the next portion of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) (with smaller diameter). - With reference now to
FIGS. 28A and 28B , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 28A and 28B is similar to that ofFIGS. 24A and 24B except that position fixedvalves moveable jets 254.Moveable jets 254 are disposedadjacent wafer 31 and applyelectrolyte 34 onto specific portions ofwafer 34.Moveable jets 254 also sit onguide bar 250, and can move along the X direction as shown inFIGS. 28A and 28B . Additionally, in the present exemplary embodiment, fresh electrolyte is supplied throughflexible pipe 258. - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 200; - Step 2: Turn on
pump 33,LMFC 55, and drivingmechanism 30. Turn onvalves 356, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portions ofwafer 31 abovevalves 356. In this manner, metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) on the portions ofwafer 31 abovevalves 356 are suitably electropolished; - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 200,LMFC 55, andvalves 356; - Step 4: Move
cathode jet 254 to the next position; and - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 4 until metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) has been electropolished fromwafer 31.
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 29A and 29B , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 29A and 29B is similar to that ofFIGS. 28A and 28B except that two additional moveable cathode jets are added in the Y direction in order to increasing polishing speed. However, the process sequence is similar to that ofFIGS. 28A and 28B . - With reference now to
FIGS. 30A and 30B , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 30A and 30B is similar to that ofFIGS. 28A and 28B except thatwafer 31 is immersed intoelectrolyte 34.Moveable jets 254 are disposed adjacent towafer 31 to focus polishing current on a specific portion ofwafer 31. In the present alternative embodiment, the gap betweenmoveable jet 254 andwafer 31 can be in the range of about 0.1 millimeters to about 5 millimeters, and preferably about 1 millimeter. Again, the process sequence is similar to that ofFIGS. 28A and 28B . - With reference now to
FIGS. 31A and 31B , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 31A and 31B is similar to that ofFIGS. 30A and 30B except thatfresh electrolyte 34 can be delivered throughpipe 260 instead ofmoveable jets flexible pipe 258.Wafer 31 also can be immersed inelectrolyte 34, andmoveable jets wafer 31 to focus polishing current on a specific portion ofwafer 31. In the present alternative embodiment, the gap betweenmoveable jets wafer 31 can be in the range of about 0.1 millimeters to about 5 millimeters, and preferably about 1 millimeter. Again the process sequence is similar to that ofFIGS. 28A and 28B . - With reference now to
FIGS. 32A, 32 , 32C and 32D, four additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.FIG. 32A shows a moveable jet, which preferably includescathode 252 andcase 262.Case 262 can be suitably formed from an insulator material, such as Teflon, CPVC, PVDF, Polypropylene, and the like.FIG. 32B shows a moveable jet consisting ofcathode 266 andcase 264.Electrolyte 34 can be delivered through a hole suitably formed at the bottom ofcase 264.FIG. 32C shows a moveable jet, which preferably includescathode 262,electrodes case 262, andpower supplies Electrode 274 can be suitably connected to the negative output ofpower supply 276, andelectrode 270 can be connected towafer 31. In accordance with one aspect of the present invention,electrode 276 preferably traps metal ions flowing out ofcase 262, therefore reducing film buildup in the area outside ofcase 262. Additionally,electrode 270 preferably prevents electrical field leakage fromelectrode 276 to minimize etch effect. The embodiment ofFIG. 32D is similar to that ofFig.32C , except thatcase 264 has a hole at the bottom forelectrolyte 34. - With reference now to
FIG. 34A, 34B , 34C and 34D, four additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown. The embodiment ofFIG. 34A is similar to those ofFIGS. 28A and 28B except that three bars are preferably used. The angle between two adjacent bars can be preferably about 60°. The embodiment ofFIG. 34B is similar to those ofFIGS. 28A and 28B except that four bars are preferably used. The angle between two adjacent bars can be preferably about 45°. The embodiment ofFIG. 34 C is similar to those ofFIGS. 28A and 28B except that half of a bar is used. Again, it should be recognized that any number of bars can be employed without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. Additionally, any two adjacent bars can be separated by any desired angle without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. The embodiment ofFIG. 34D is similar to those ofFIGS. 28A and 28B except that the straight bar is replaced by a spiral bar. - With reference now to
FIG. 35 , two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown. The embodiments ofFIGS. 35A and 35B are similar to those ofFIGS. 28A and 28B exceptwafer 31 can be positioned upside down and vertically, respectively. - With reference now to
FIGS. 36A and 36B , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 36A and 36B is similar to that ofFIGS. 14A and 14B except that all cathodes are replaced by a one-piece cathode 8. In the present alternative embodiment,cathode 8 can be suitably connected tosingle power supply 11. - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 21 andvalves electrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovesub-polishing bath 66, and then flows back toelectrolyte reservoir 36 through the spaces betweensection walls FIG. 1A ) is electropolished from the portion ofwafer 31 abovesub-polishing bath 66; - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 11 and turn off LMFC 21; - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for LMFC 22 (turn on
LMFC 22,valves 81, 83, 84, andpower supply 11, and turn off LMFCs 21, 23, and 24, valve 82); - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for LMFC 23 (turn on
LMFC 23,valves power supply 11, and turn off LMFCs 21, 22, and 24, valve 83); and - Step 6: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for LMFC 24 (turn on
LMFC 24,valves 81, 82, 83, andpower supply 11, and turn off LMFCs 21, 22 and 23, and valve 84).
In the above described polishing process, instead of polishing from the periphery ofwafer 31 to the center ofwafer 31, the polishing also can be performed from center to periphery, or can be performed randomly choosing various cathode sequences.
- Step 1: Turn on
- In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFCs valves electrolyte 34 from each LMFC 21, 22 and 23 can be suitably set proportionate to the surface area ofwafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supply 11 andLMFCs FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness. Also, power supplies 11, 12 and 13 can be turned off at different times to adjust the thickness uniformity of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ).
LMFCs can be turned off at different times in order to adjust the electropolishing film thickness uniformity as shown inFIG. 37 . At time t1, only LMFCs 21, 23, and 24 are turned off, andvalves 81, 83, and 84 are also turned off. Therefore,electrolyte 34 does not contactwafer 31 except for the portion ofwafer 31 abovesub-polishing bath 64. As thepower supply 11 remains turned on, metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) can be suitably electropolished from the portion ofwafer 31 abovesub-polishing bath 64. At time t2 LMFC 22 is turned off. Similarly,LMFC 24 is turned on at time t3 and turned off at time t4 to obtain extra polishing of portions ofwafer 31 abovesub-polishing bath 60. Times t2 and t4 can be fine-tuned by measuring wafer thickness uniformity.
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 38A and 38B , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 38A and 38B is similar to that ofFIGS. 7A and 7B except that all cathodes are connected tosingle power supply 11. Since the electrolyte only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 being selectively electropolished, a majority of the polishing current will come from the cathode and go to that portion ofwafer 31. The polishing process steps are similar to those ofFIGS. 7A and 7B , with power supply replacingpower supplies - With reference now to
FIGS. 39A and 39B , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment ofFIGS. 39A and 39B is similar to that ofFIGS. 38A and 38B except thatsection FIG. 41 ,section walls wafer 31 abovesection walls - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 21 only and movesection walls wafer 31, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection walls FIG. 1A ) on the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection walls - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 11, turn off LMFC 21, and movesection walls - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
section walls LMFC 22 andsection walls - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
section wall 109, usingLMFC 23 andsection wall 109.
- Step 1: Turn on
- In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFCs section tube 109 close towafer 31. The flow rate ofelectrolyte 34 fromLMFCs wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode; and - Step 3: Move all section walls down to a lower position, and turn off all LMFCs at the same time, then turn off
power supply 11. Each pair of section walls can also be moved down at a different time, with power supply on, in order adjust thickness uniformity. For example, as shown inFIGS. 39A and 39B ,section walls LMFC 22 on.Wafer 31 will be selectively electropolished in the area betweensection walls
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 40A and 40B , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.FIGS. 40A and 40B illustrate an embodiment with multiple power supplies and a single LMFC for polishing metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) directly on a substrate with a barrier layer on top. The embodiment ofFIGS. 40A and 40B is similar to that ofFIGS. 14A and 14B except that LMFCs 21, 22, 23 and 24 are replaced by asingle LMFC 55. - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11 to output negative potential toelectrode 4, and turn onpower supplies electrodes - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 55, thereby immersing the whole wafer intoelectrolyte 34. In this manner, metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) will be polished away only from the portion ofwafer 31 abovecathode 4; - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 11; - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 3 (turn on
power supply 12 to output positive potential tocathode 3, andpower supplies cathodes - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 2 (turn on
power supply 13 to output positive potential tocathode 2, andpower supplies cathodes - Step 6: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for cathode 1 (turn on
power supply 14 to output positive potential tocathode 1, andpower supplies cathodes
- Step 1: Turn on
-
FIG. 41 shows the power supply turn on/off sequence for polishing wafer areas 4 (above cathode 4), 3, 2, and then 1. The power supply output wave form can be selected from a variety of wave forms such as a modified sine-wave form, a unipolar pulse, a pulse reverse, a pulse-on-pulse, or a duplex pulse, as shown inFIG. 42 . - In the above selective electropolishing process, instead of electropolishing from the periphery to the center of the wafer, electropolishing can also be performed from center to periphery, or can be performed randomly by choosing an arbitrary cathode sequence.
- In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supplies power supply wafer 31 covered by the corresponding cathode. - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 55; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supplies FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness. Also, power supplies 11, 12, 13 and 14 can be turned off at different times to adjust the thickness uniformity of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ).
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 43A and 43B , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.FIGS. 43A and 43B show an embodiment of the apparatus with multiple power supplies and a single LMFC for polishing metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) directly on substrate 123 (FIG. 1A ) with barrier layer 122 (FIG. 1A ) on top. The embodiment ofFIGS. 43A and 43B is similar to that ofFIGS. 40A and 40B except that section walls can move up and down to adjust the flow pattern. As shown inFIGS. 43A and 43B ,section walls wafer 31 abovewalls - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 55 and movesection walls wafer 31, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection walls FIG. 1A ) on the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection walls - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 11, and movesection walls - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
section wall section walls power supply 12; and - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
section wall 109, usingsection wall 109 andpower supply 13.
- Step 1: Turn on
- In addition to selectively electropolishing portions of
wafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: -
- Step 1: Turn on
power supplies power supply wafer 31 that is covered by the corresponding cathode; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 55, and move allsection section wall 109 close towafer 31; and - Step 3: Turn off
power supplies FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness. Also, power supplies 11, 12 and 13 can be turned off at different times to adjust the thickness uniformity of metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ).
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 44A and 44B , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.FIGS. 44A and 44B show an embodiment of the apparatus with a single power supply and single LMFC for polishing metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) directly on substrate 123 (FIG. 1A ) with barrier layer 122 (FIG. 1A ) on top. The embodiment ofFIGS. 44A and 44B is similar to that ofFIGS. 43A and 43B except that one power supply is used, and all cathodes are connected tosingle power supply 11. Similarly, section walls can move up and down to adjust the flow pattern. As shown inFIGS. 44A and 44B ,section walls wall - Using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be suitably employed to selectively electropolish portions of wafer 31:
-
- Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 55 and movesection walls wafer 31, such thatelectrolyte 34 only contacts the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection walls FIG. 1A ) on the portion ofwafer 31 abovesection walls - Step 3: When metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) reaches a set value or thickness, turn offpower supply 11, and movesection walls - Step 4: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for
section walls 105 and 107 (movesection walls wafer 31, and turn on power supply 11); and - Step 5: Repeat steps 1 to 3 for section walls 109 (move
section wall 109 up close towafer 31, and turn on power supply 11).
In addition to selectively electropolishing portions ofwafer 31, using the present alternative embodiment described above, the following process steps can be employed to electropolish the entire surface ofwafer 31 at one time: - Step 1: Turn on
power supply 11; - Step 2: Turn on
LMFC 55, and move allsection wafer 31; and - Step 3: Move all section walls down to a lower position at the same time, then turn off power supplies 11. Each pair of section walls can also be moved down at different times, with power supply on, in order adjust thickness uniformity. For example, as shown in
FIGS. 44A and 44B ,section walls section wall
- Step 1: Turn on
- With reference now to
FIGS. 45 and 46 , two additional alternative embodiments of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, are shown.FIGS. 45 and 46 show embodiments configured with an in-situ film thickness uniformity monitor.Sensors 500 can be ultrasonic type thickness measurement sensors. Signal detected fromsensors 500 is sent back tocomputer 502. The in-situ thickness data can be used to adjust or control polishing uniformity and final thickness. - With reference now to
FIG. 58 , one embodiment of the present invention includes adrive mechanism 1000, achuck 1002, awafer 1004, aninjection nozzle 1008, and an end-point detector 1006. During the electropolishing process,drive mechanism 1000 can be configured to rotate wafer 1004 (indicated inFIG. 58 as about the z-axis).Drive mechanism 1000 can also be configured to movewafer 1000 horizontally relative to nozzle 1008 (indicated inFIG. 58 as the x-direction). As alluded to earlier with regard to another embodiment, this movement of the wafer during electropolishing can enhance the uniformity of the electropolished wafer surface. - Additionally, during the electropolishing process, end-
point detector 1006 is configured to detect the thickness of the metal layer onwafer 1004. As described above with regard to the embodiments depicted inFIGS. 45 and 46 , end-point detector 1006 can include various sensors, such as ultrasonic sensors. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1006 is configured as an optical reflection sensor. Accordingly, as the metal layer is electropolished, end-point detector 1006 responds to the changing reflectivity of the wafer surface. - More particularly, with reference to
FIG. 59 , for illustrative purpose, a graph depicting the changes in the reflectivity of a wafer surface is shown. It should be recognized, however, that the shape of the curve depicted inFIG. 59 can vary depending on the particular application. - In the graph in
FIG. 59 , the portion of the line before point A corresponds to the portion of the electropolishing process when the metal layer on the wafer surface is being removed. The reflectivity of the wafer surface does not change significantly during this portion of the electropolishing process because the wafer surface remains covered by the metal layer. - In the graph in
FIG. 59 , point A corresponds to the portion of the electropolishing process when the metal layer has nearly been removed from the surface of the wafer, but the trenches and/or vias remain filled with the metal layer. At this point, the reflectivity begins to change because the barrier layer and/or dielectric layer typically has a different reflection rate than the metal layer. - In the graph in
FIG. 59 , point C corresponds to the portion of the electropolishing process when the metal layer has been completely removed from the surface of the wafer. At this point, the reflectivity begins to level off again. - Thus, to facilitate a smooth, planar, and non-recessed wafer surface, the electropolishing process is stopped between points A and C. Toward this end, end-
point detector 1006 can be configured to provide the optical reflection rate of an area of the wafer during electropolishing. - More particularly, the local reflection rate of an area of the wafer Rlight can be expressed as follows:
R light= R light (r,θ)
Where, r is the radius of the area being electropolished. θ is the rotating angle of the area being electropolished. - The electropolishing process can be stopped or ended when Rlight measured by end-
point detector 1006 reaches a predetermined rate Rtarget. The value of Rtarget can be determined experimentally. For example, wafers can be processed at various Rtarget settings to determine the value that produces the desired wafer surface profile. Once this value is determined, it can be used to process additional wafers. - Alternatively, Rtarget can be calculated based on the pattern structure on the wafer. More particularly, each area of the wafer includes a portion with metal layers formed within trenches and/or vias and the remaining portion with a barrier layer and/or dielectric layer. Thus, a pattern density PD can be calculated as follows:
Where, SAML is the surface area with trenches and/or vias. SAT is the total surface area. The values for SAML and SAT of any location on the wafer can be obtained from the mask design of the wafer. The target optical reflectivity Rtarget can then be calculated as follows:
R target=(R ML ×PD)+[R barrier×(1−PD)]
Where, RML is the reflectivity of the metal layer. R barrier is the reflectivity of the barrier layer. It should be recognized that if the wafer does not include a barrier layer, then Rbarrier would be the reflectivity of the dielectric layer. - Thus, at any location r and θ on the wafer, end-
point detector 1006 provides a measurement of the optical reflectivity Rlight. For that location, the target optical reflectivity Rtarget can be calculated based on the pattern density PD data obtained from the mask design of the wafer. When the measured optical reflectivity Rlight equals the target optical reflectivity Rtarget,then electropolishing can be stopped for that area. - As described earlier with regard to various embodiments, the electropolishing process can be stopped or ended entirely (for example, by turning off the power supply). Alternatively, the electropolishing rate can be reduced to continue to monitor the reflectivity of the metal layer on the wafer surface. If the reflectivity increases (for example, as in unpolished patches or areas of the wafer), then the electropolishing rate can be increased.
- As also described earlier with regard to various embodiments, the power supply (not shown) can be operated in DC mode or in a variety of pulse modes. Additionally, it can be operated in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Further, when a pulsed power supply is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied.
- With reference now to
FIG. 60 , aswafer 1004 is rotated and moved horizontally, the metal layer on the wafer surface can be electropolished from the center to the edge ofwafer 1004 in a spiral pattern. It should be recognized, however, thatwafer 1004 can be electropolished in any pattern or order. For example,wafer 1004 can be electropolished beginning from the edge to the center ofwafer 1004. Alternatively,wafer 1004 can be electropolished beginning and ending from any points between the edge and the center ofwafer 1004. - Additionally, the signals from end-
point detectors 1006 can be used to control the speed of the rotation and horizontal movement ofwafer 1004. It can also be used to control the polishing power and the polishing rate used. More particularly, the signals from end-point detectors 1006 can be provided to ananalyzer 1009.Analyzer 1009 is configured to evaluate and process the signals received from end-point detectors 1006. Based on these signals,analyzer 1009 can then control the rotation and horizontal movement ofwafer 1004, the polishing power, and the polishing rate.Analyzer 1009 can include any convenient processing processor, such as an electronic circuit, a computer chip, a computer, and the like.Analyzer 1009 can also include any convenient programming instructions or software needed to carry out the various functions described herein. - When the wafer is translated with constant horizontal speed and the polishing power is constant, the rotation speed can be altered as follows:
ω=C 1 {[R light(r,θ)−R target(r,θ)]N r}
where, ω is the speed of rotation ofwafer 1004. r is the distance betweennozzle 1008 and the center ofwafer 1004. C1 is a constant. N can include any number including integer, rational and irrational fraction. Values for C1 and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile. - When the wafer is translated with constant horizontal speed and the polishing power is varied, the rotation speed can be expressed as follows:
Where, ω is the speed of rotation ofwafer 1004. r is the distance betweennozzle 1008 and the center ofwafer 1004. v0 is the constant tangent speed of the area ofwafer 1004 relative tonozzle 1008. Ppolishing is the electropolishing power being applied. This can include DC or pulsed power. It can include power provided in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Also, when a pulsed power is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied. C2 is a constant. N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C2 and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile. - When the wafer is translated with constant rotation speed and the polishing power is constant, the horizontal speed can be expressed as follows:
v r =C 3 /{[R light(r,θ)−R target(r,θ)]N r}
Where, vr is the horizontal speed ofwafer 1004. r is the distance betweennozzle 1008 and center ofwafer 1004. C3 is a constant. N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C3 and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile. - When the wafer is translated with constant rotation speed and the polishing power can be varied, the horizontal speed can be expressed as follows:
where, vr is the horizontal speed ofwafer 1004. r the horizontal distance betweennozzle 1008 and center ofwafer 1004. Ppolishing is the electropolishing power being applied. This can include DC or pulsed power. It can include power provided in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Also, when a pulsed power is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied. C4 and C5 are constants. N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C4, C5, and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile. - When just the polishing power is constant, then the rotation speed and the horizontal movement speed can be expressed as follows:
or
Where, ω is the speed of rotation ofwafer 1004. r is the horizontal distance betweennozzle 1008 and the center ofwafer 1004. Vr is the horizontal speed ofwafer 1004. . C6 and C7 are constants. N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C6, C7, and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile. - When the polishing power can be varied, then the rotation speed and the horizontal movement speed can be expressed as follows:
or
Where, ω is the speed of rotation ofwafer 1004. r is the distance betweennozzle 1008 and the center ofwafer 1004. Vr is the horizontal speed ofwafer 1004. Ppolishing is the electropolishing power being applied. This can include DC or pulsed power. It can include power provided in constant current mode, constant voltage mode, or combination of these modes. Also, when a pulsed power is used, the duty cycle can be constant or varied. C5, C6, and C7 are constants. N can include any number, such as integer, rational and irrational fractions, and the like. Values for C5, C6, C7, and N can be determined experimentally to tune the electropolishing process to produce the desired wafer surface profile. - In one exemplary embodiment, where the electrolyte used for the electropolishing process is 85% (wt.) H2PO4 and for a 300 mm wafer, w can be in the range of about 1 to about 500 revolutions per minute. Vr can be in the range of about 0.01 cm/second to about 1 cm/second. R can be in the range of about 0.1 cm to about 15 cm for a nozzle with an inner diameter of about 0.1 cm. The polishing current density can range between 0 mA/cm2 to about 50 mA/cm2. The polishing voltage density can range between about 0 volts to about 5 volts. It should be recognized, however, that these values are only exemplary and that they can vary depending on the particular application.
- With reference now to
FIG. 61 , another embodiment of the present invention includes an additional end-point detector 1010. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1010 can be configured to provide the optical reflection profile after electropolishing of an area of the wafer surface. Thus, end-point detectors - With reference now to
FIG. 62 , another embodiment of the present invention includes a third additional end-point detector 1012. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1012 can be configured to provide the optical reflection profile before electropolishing of an area of the wafer surface. The difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors wafer 1004. This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed ofwafer 1004, and the like. - With reference now to
FIG. 63A , another embodiment of the present invention includes a fourth end-point detector 1014. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1014 can be configured to provide the electropolishing status after one complete electropolishing cycle (i.e., the nozzle moves relatively from center to edge of the wafer one time). This information can be provided to a computer to tune the polishing process. More particularly, adjustments can be made to the polishing power, rotation speed, horizontal speed ofwafer 1004, and the like. - With reference now to
FIG. 63B , another embodiment of the present invention includes a fifth end-point detector 1016. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1016 can be configured to provide the electropolishing status before electropolishing. The difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors wafer 1004, and the like. - With reference now to
FIG. 64A , another embodiment of the present invention includes an additional end-point detector 1020 inside ofnozzle 1008. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1020 can be configured to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished. The difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors wafer 1004, and the like. - With reference now to
FIG. 64B , another embodiment of the present invention includes a third end-point detector 1030 inside ofnozzle 1008. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1030 can be configured to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished. The difference of reflection rate rate measured by end-point detectors wafer 1004, and the like. - With reference now to
FIG. 64C , another embodiment of the present invention includes a fourth end-point detector 1040 inside ofnozzle 1008. In the present embodiment, end-point detector 1040 can be configured to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished. The difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors 1010 and 120 can be used to determine the electropolishing profile in the x-direction (as depicted inFIG. 15C ). The difference of reflection rate measured by end-point detectors wafer 1004, and the like. - With reference to
FIG. 64D , another embodiment of the present invention includes a fifth end-point detector 1050 inside ofnozzle 1008. It should be recognized that any number of end-point detectors can be disposed withinnozzle 1008 to detect the electropolishing uniformity in the area being electropolished. - Thus far, the end-point detectors described above have been depicted as having circular shapes. But it should be recognized that they can also include various alternative shapes. For example, with reference now to
FIGS. 65A to E, end-point detector 1006 is depicted as having a circular, a triangular, a square, a trapezoidal, and an elliptical shape. Additionally, thus far,nozzle 1008 has been depicted as having a circular shape. But it should be recognized that it can also include various alternative shapes. For example, with reference now toFIGS. 66A to E,nozzle 1008 is depicted as having a circular, a triangular, a square, a trapezoidal, and an elliptical shape. - With reference now to
FIG. 67A and B, another embodiment of the present invention includesdrive mechanism 1000,chuck 1002,wafer 1004. The present embodiment also includes a polishingreceptacle 1100, which is divided into multiple sections bysection walls Cathodes point detectors wafer 1004. More particularly, anoptical fiber 504 can be connected to each end-point detector FIG. 67A ,optical fiber 504 extends into the sections of polishingreceptacle 1100. The end-point detectors are also connected to analyzer 1009 that is configured to evaluate and/or process the signals received from the end-point detectors.Analyzer 1009 can be any convenient processor, such as a circuit, a computer chip, a computer, and the like.Analyzer 1009 can also include any convenient programming instructions or software needed to carry out the various functions described herein - As described in greater detail with regard to various alternative embodiments,
wafer 1004 can be electropolished by delivering an electrolyte into polishingreceptacle 1100. More particularly, the electrolyte can be directed to any one or more of the sections ofreceptacle 1100 defined bysection walls cathodes wafer 1004 is held bychuck 1002 and rotated bydrive mechanism 1000. In the manner described above, this electropolishing process can be controlled using end-point detectors - After this initial electropolishing process is completed, an additional electropolishing process can be provided by injecting electrolyte through a nozzle disposed within the first section defined by
section wall 1109. An electrical charge is applied throughcathode 1.Wafer 1004 is then translated horizontally bydrive mechanism 1000. In the manner described above, this electropolishing process can be controlled using end-point detectors - By way of example, the following is an exemplary process for controlling the electropolishing of wafer 1004:
-
- Step 1: Turn on electrolyte flow to all sections of
receptacle 1100, and rotatewafer 1004; - Step 2: Apply an electrical charge to the electrolyte through
cathodes - Step 3: When reflectivity measured by each end-
point detector - Step 4: Turn on electrolyte flow to nozzle disposed within section defined by
section wall 1109, apply charge throughcathode 1, and movechuck 1004 horizontally such that flow of electrolyte moves across the surface ofwafer 1004 from center to edge through a spiral path; - Step 5: Using measurements provided by end-
point detectors - Step 6: Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the desired surface is obtained on
wafer 1004; and - Step 7: Stop process, unload
wafer 1004, and load new wafer for electropolishing.
- Step 1: Turn on electrolyte flow to all sections of
- It should be recognized that various modifications can be made to the above process steps. For example, in
step 3, the electrolyte flow and power can be turned off based on target optical reflectivity calculated from pattern density data rather than a predetermined value for the optical reflectivity. Also, instep 4,wafer 1004 can be moved in various directions to apply the electrolyte moves acrosswafer 1004 in any desired pattern. - With reference now to
FIG. 47 , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.FIG. 47 shows an embodiment configured to be a stand-alone, fully computer-controlled wafer-processing tool with automatic wafer transfer, cleaning module with wafer dry-in and dry-out capability. It preferably includes five stacked polishingreceptacles dry chambers robot 322,wafer cassettes electrolyte reservoir 36, andplumbing box 330. As described before, polishingbath 300 preferably includes a plurality of cathodes, a plurality of power supplies, a plurality of section walls or tubes, a wafer chuck, and a driving mechanism, which rotates or oscillateswafer 31 during the electropolishing process.Electrolyte reservoir 36 preferably includes a temperature control sensor.Plumbing box 330 preferably includes of a pump, LMFCs, valves, filters, and plumbing. The polishing system further preferably includes a computer control hardware and an appropriate operating software package. The operation process sequence is described as follows: -
- Step A:
Load wafer cassettes robot 322; - Step B: Select recipe and push run button;
- Step C: Initialize the system using the control software, including checking any and all system parameters, and monitoring for any alarms existing in the system;
- Step D: After completing the initialization,
robot 322 picks up a wafer fromcassette receptacles - Step E: Metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) on the wafer is then electropolished; - Step F: After electropolishing,
robot 322 picks up the polished wafer from the polishing receptacle, then transports it to one of cleaning/dryingchambers - Step G: The electropolished wafer is then cleaned;
- Step H: The electropolished wafer is then dried using any convenient drying process, such as spin-drying and/or N2 purging; and
- Step I: Finally, the dried wafer is then transported to
cassette robot 322.
- Step A:
-
FIG. 48 shows the process sequence for polishing multiple wafers simultaneously. The process sequence for polishing multiple wafers is similar to that for electropolishing a single wafer, except that the computer checks for any unprocessed wafers remaining incassette cassette cassette 320 and/or 321, the system will return to step D (i.e.,robot 322 picks up the unprocessed wafer from the cassette and transports it to one of the polishing receptacles). - Process step E can preferably include a two-process step, the first being to selectively electropolish metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) on the wafer, and the second being to electropolish metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) on the whole wafer simultaneously. - Instead of cleaning a wafer in one chamber, the cleaning process can be performed in different chambers. The cleaning process can also consist of several steps, and each step can use different solutions, different concentrations of solutions, or different hardware.
- Instead of arranging five polishing receptacles and five-cleaning/drying chambers, the number of polishing receptacles and number of cleaning/drying chambers can be varied from 1 to 10 as shown in the following table:
TABLE 4 Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No. of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 polishing receptacles No. of 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cleaning/ drying chambers
In accordance with various aspects of the present invention,types - With reference now to
FIG. 49 , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown.FIG. 49 shows an embodiment configured as a wafer-polishing tool. The embodiment ofFIG. 49 is similar to that ofFIG. 47 , except thatcassette 320 can be moved up and down by arobot 323. The position ofcassette 320 can be moved up and down to match the position of the polishing receptacle or cleaning/dry chamber. Accordingly,robot 322 does not need to move in the Z direction when picking up an unprocessed wafer fromcassette 320 or putting a polished dry wafer back intocassette 320. In this manner, the operating speed ofrobot 323 can be suitably increased. - With reference now to
FIG. 50 , still another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment shown inFIG. 50 is similar to that ofFIG. 47 except thatrobot 322 itself can move in the X direction. Accordingly,robot 322 need not rotate about the Z axis. - With reference now to
FIG. 51 , yet another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment shown inFIG. 51 is similar to that ofFIG. 47 except that polishing receptacles and cleaning/drying chambers are put in one column. Compared with the embodiment ofFIG. 47 , the foot print of the system is reduced, however wafer throughput can be slower. - With reference now to
FIG. 52 , another alternative embodiment of the present invention, according to various aspects of the present invention, is shown. The embodiment shown inFIG. 52 preferably includes three columns of polishing receptacles and cleaning/drying chambers, linearlymoveable robot 322,operation screen 340, two cassettes stacked adjacent to each other,plumbing box 330, andelectrolyte reservoir 36. The polishing process steps are similar to those described inFIG. 47 . -
FIG. 54 shows still another embodiment of apparatus for polishing metal layer 121 (FIG. 1A ) in accordance with the present invention. The embodiment ofFIG. 54 is similar to that ofFIGS. 28A and 28B except that multi-jets are replaced by asingle jet 255. Additionally,cathode jet 255 remains stationary whilewafer 31 is moved along the X-axis (left and right). More particularly, in the present exemplary embodiment,cathode jet 255 injects electrolyte onto selected portions ofwafer 31, whilewafer 31 is rotated and moved in the X-axis substantially simultaneously by drive means 30 and guidebar 35. Whenwafer 31 is moved to the left side,cathode jet 255 injects electrolyte on to the center portion ofwafer 31. Whenwafer 31 is moved to the right side,cathode jet 255 injects electrolyte onto the periphery portion ofwafer 31. In accordance with one aspect of the present invention, the rotation speed ofwafer 31 can be kept at a constant rate during the polishing process. The speed with whichwafer 31 is moved along the x-axis can be varied from large to small as drive means 30 moves the center portion ofwafer 31 away from thecathode jet 255. This speed ofwafer 31 along the x-axis (Vx) can be expressed as follows:
Where C is a constant, x is the distance between center ofwafer 31 andcathode jet 255 in the x-axis, and r the radius of liquid column made bycathode jet 255. - It should be recognized, however, that various modifications can be made to the configuration of the wafer polishing cell without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. For example, the angle between
wafer 31 andcathode jet 255 can be kept at any constant angle, or the angle can be changed during the polishing process. The wafer itself can be placed at any angle relative to polishingreceptacle 100 . In the embodiment ofFIG. 54 ,jet 255 can be moved instead of movingwafer 31, or bothjet 255 andwafer 31 can be moved to achieve the same results. In the embodiment ofFIG. 54 ,wafer 31 can be immersed in the electrolyte, instead of being contacted by the jet stream of the electrolyte. - With reference again to
FIG. 1B , aftermetal layer 121 is electropolished frombarrier layer 122 formed onmesas 126, a layer of metal can be replated onwafer 31 to fix recesses 127. As alluded to earlier, this replating process can be performed using any convenient plating process. One such process is an electroless plating process. - In general, electroless plating differs from electroplating in that electrodes are not used in electroless plating. In brief, metal ions are provided in an electroless solution. More particularly the electroless solution typically contains a reducing agent that facilitates plating.
- The use of electroless plating is particularly advantageous in this application in that
metal layer 121 intrenches 125 will tend to promote plating, whilebarrier layer 122 will not. Also, electroless plating generally produces a more uniform deposition as it does not suffer from ohmic effects. Thus, recesses 127 can be fixed (i.e., filled in) using an electroless plating process. - With reference now to
FIGS. 68A and 68B , anelectroless plating module 1101 in accordance with one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown. As alluded to above and as will be described in greater detail below,electroless plating module 1101 is configured to replate a metal layer on wafer 31 (FIG. 1B ) to fix recesses 127 (FIG. 1B ). Additionally,electroless plating module 1101 can be configured to clean and todry wafer 1128. It should be recognized, however, thatelectroless plating module 1101 can be configured to perform various processes depending on the particular application. For example, as will be described with reference to various alternative embodiments,electroless plating module 1101 can be configured to perform an etching process. - In one embodiment
electroless plating module 1101 is configured to use any electroless solutions suitable for use with copper, such as copper sulfate (CuSiO4—5H2O) at about 8 g/l, EDTA (tetrasodium) at about 14 g/l, formaldehyde (NCOOH) at 20 ml/l, Methyldichlorosilane (CH3Cl2SiH) at 0.25 g/l. It should be recognized, however, that the electroless solution can include various chemistries depending on the application. - Additionally, the electroless solution is maintained at between about 20 degrees Celsius and about 80 degrees Celsius. Accordingly, a deposition rate of about 100 Angstroms per minute to about 1000 Angstroms per minute can be obtained. It should be recognized, however, that the electroless solution can be maintained at various temperatures and that various deposition rates can be used.
- As depicted in
FIGS. 68A and 68B ,electroless plating module 1101 preferably includes amodule chamber 1116, acover 1126, awafer loading door 1124, achuck 1120, amotor 1118, and liquid/gas injection pipe module chamber 1116,cover 1126 andloading door 1126 are configured to sealelectroless plating module 1101. In this manner,electroless plating module 1101 can be sealed to isolate the environment withinelectroless plating module 1101 from the outside environment. This has the advantage of preventing contaminants from the outside environment from enteringelectroless plating module 1101. It also has the advantage of preventing fluids and/or vapors from escaping fromelectroless plating module 1101. Accordingly, as will be described below and depicted in various drawing figures,wafer loading door 1124 opens and closes to permit entry intoelectroless plating module 101. It should be recognized, however, thatelectroless plating module 1101 can include various alternative configurations. For example,electroless plating module 1101 can be configured withoutcover 1126 andloading door 1126. Accordingly, in this configuration, direct access can be gained toelectroless plating module 1101 without having to open and closewafer loading door 1124. Alternatively, with reference toFIG. 69A ,electroless plating module 1101 can include twowafer loading doors wafer 1128 can be loaded from one side and removed from another side. - In the present embodiment depicted in
FIGS. 68A and 68B ,electroless plating module 1101 includes acover 1126 and oneloading door 1124. As such,loading door 1124 opens to permit access intoelectroless plating module 1101. More particularly,loading door 1124 opens to permit loading and removal ofwafer 1128 fromelectroless plating module 1101. It should be recognized thatloading door 1124 can be opened and closed manually or using any convenient actuator, such as spring, motor, robot, and the like. - In the present embodiment,
wafer 1128 is loaded and removed fromelectroless plating module 1101 usingrobot 1122. It should be recognized thatrobot 1122 can be a robot specifically dedicated to loading and unloadingelectroless plating module 1101. Alternatively, as will be described in greater detail below,electroless plating module 1101 can be a component of a wafer processing tool in whichrobot 1122 is a multipurpose robot. It should also be recognized thatwafer 1128 can be loaded and removed using various wafer transfer systems, such as air tracks, water tracks, and the like. As an additional alternative,wafer 1128 can be manually loaded and removed fromelectroless plating module 1101. - In the present embodiment,
injection pipes electroless plating module 1101. Althoughelectroless plating module 1101 is depicted having seven injection pipes, it should be recognized thatelectroless plating module 1101 can include any number of injection pipes. It should also be recognized thatinjection pipes - Additionally, any number of
injection pipes electroless plating module 1101. It should be recognized, however, thatinjection pipes injection pipes - In the present embodiment,
wafer chuck 1120 andmotor 1118 are configured to hold and to rotatewafer 1128 withinelectroless plating module 1101. More particularly,wafer chuck 1120 includes a plurality oflocks 1121 configured to holdwafer 1128 when rotated and to releasewafer 1128 when stopped. In one embodiment, locks 1121 can include any convenient centrifugal-force locks.Motor 1118 can include any convenient motor, such as a step motor, a DC motor, and the like. Additionally,motor 1118 includes rotation speed control and homing function. - In the following and preceding descriptions, various process steps have been described. It should be recognized that each of these steps, and combination of steps, can be implemented as computer program instructions. It should also be recognized that each of these steps, and combination of steps, can be implemented by special purpose hardware-based computer systems that perform the specified functions or steps, or combination of special purpose hardware and computer instructions.
- As alluded to above, after
wafer 1128 has been electroplated,wafer 1128 can be replated to fix recesses 127 (FIG. 1B ). The following is an exemplary process forreplating wafer 1128 using electroless plating module 1101: -
-
Step 1.Loading door 1124 moves to an open position. -
Step 2 .Robot 1122 loadswafer 1128 intoelectroless plating module 1101. -
Step 3.Loading door 1124 moves to a closed position. -
Step 4.Chuck 1120 starts rotatingwafer 1128. In one embodiment,chuck 1120 rotateswafer 1128 at a speed between about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably at about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 5. A cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 6. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. - Step 7. After
wafer 1128 has been dried, an electroless-plating solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1112. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to replatewafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is electroless plated for a period of time between about a few seconds to about a few hundred seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 8. Afterwafer 1128 has been replated, a cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. Additionally, an etching solution is provided on the back side of wafer 1128 (i.e., the side ofwafer 1128 that has not been plated) to clean any metal or other contaminants. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 9. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. - Step 10. After the wafer is dried,
wafer chuck 1120 stops.Loading door 1124 is then moved to an unload position, andwafer 1128 is removed fromelectroless plating module 1101.
-
- As described earlier, after
wafer 1128 has been replated, it can be planarized. More particularly, with reference to Figs 1C and 1D,metal layer 126 that was replated ontrenches 125 is planarized, andbarrier layer 122 is removed. In one embodiment described earlier, this process was performed using a CMP process. With reference again toFIGS. 68A and 68B , in the present exemplary embodiment, this process can be performed using electroless plating module 1101: -
-
Step 1.Loading door 1124 moves to an open position. -
Step 2.Robot 1122 loadswafer 1128 intoelectroless plating module 1101. -
Step 3.Loading door 1124 moves to a closed position. -
Step 4.Chuck 1120 starts rotatingwafer 1128. In one embodiment,chuck 1120 rotateswafer 1128 at a speed between about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably at about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 5. A cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 6. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. - Step 7. After
wafer 1128 has been dried, an electroless-plating solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1112. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to replatewafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is electroless plated for a period of time between about a few seconds to about a few hundred seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 8. Afterwafer 1128 has been replated, a cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. Additionally, an etching solution is provided on the back side of wafer 1128 (i.e., the side ofwafer 1128 that has not been plated) throughinjection pipe 1104. This helps to clean any metal or other contaminants from the back side ofwafer 1128. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 9. After the front side of wafer 1128 (i.e., the side ofwafer 1128 that has been plated) has been cleaned, etching solution is provided throughpipe 1114 to remove barrier layer 1122 (FIG. 1 ). This etching process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to remove barrier layer 1122 (FIG. 1 ). It should be recognized that this step can be omitted whenwafer 1128 does not have abarrier layer 1122. - Step 10. After
wafer 1128 has been etched, a cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipes wafer 1128. -
Step 11. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. -
Step 12. Afterwafer 1128 is dried,wafer chuck 1120 stops.Loading door 1124 is then moved to an unload position, andwafer 1128 is removed fromelectroless plating module 1101.
-
- As alluded to above, depending on the application,
wafer 1128 can include a metal seed layer. Whenwafer 1128 includes a metal seed layer, it can be advantageous to remove this seed layer from the edges ofwafer 1128. In one embodiment of the present invention,electroless plating module 1101 can be used to remove the seed layer from the edges of wafer 1128: -
Step 1.Loading door 1124 moves to an open position. -
Step 2.Robot 1122 loadswafer 1128 intoelectroless plating module 1101. -
-
Step 3.Loading door 1124 moves to a closed position. -
Step 4.Chuck 1120 starts rotatingwafer 1128. In one embodiment,chuck 1120 rotateswafer 1128 at a speed between about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably at about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 5. A cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 6. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. - Step 7. After
wafer 1128 has been dried, an electroless-plating solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1112. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to replatewafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is electroless plated for a period of time between about a few seconds to about a few hundred seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 8. Afterwafer 1128 has been replated, a cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. Additionally, an etching solution is provided on the back side of wafer 1128 (i.e., the side ofwafer 1128 that has not been plated) to clean any metal or other contaminants. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 9. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. - Step 10. After
wafer 1128 has been dried, an etching solution can be provided throughinjection pipe 1108 to remove the metal seed layer from the edge ofwafer 1128. -
Step 11. Cleaning and dryingsteps -
Step 12. After the wafer is dried,wafer chuck 1120 stops.Loading door 1124 is then moved to an unload position, andwafer 1128 is removed fromelectroless plating module 1101.
-
- It should be recognized that the process for removing the metal seed layer from
wafer 1128 can be included with the process ofplanarizing wafer 1128. More particularly, an exemplary process is set forth below: -
-
Step 1.Loading door 1124 moves to an open position. -
Step 2.Robot 1122 loadswafer 1128 intoelectroless plating module 1101. -
Step 3.Loading door 1124 moves to a closed position. -
Step 4.Chuck 1120 starts rotatingwafer 1128. In one embodiment,chuck 1120 rotateswafer 1128 at a speed between about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably at about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 5. A cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 6. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process, wafer chuck 120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. - Step 7. After
wafer 1128 has been dried, an electroless-plating solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1112. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to replatewafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is electroless plated for a period of time between about a few seconds to about a few hundred seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1 revolutions per minute to about 100 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 20 revolutions per minute. -
Step 8. Afterwafer 1128 has been replated, a cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipe 1100. In one embodiment, the cleaning solution is deionized water. Additionally, an etching solution is provided on the back side of wafer 1128 (i.e., the side ofwafer 1128 that has not been plated) throughinjection pipe 1104. This helps to clean any metal or other contaminants from the back side ofwafer 1128. The cleaning solution can be provided for any convenient period of time to cleanwafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is cleaned for a period of time between about 10 seconds to about 200 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. -
Step 9. After the front side of wafer 1128 (i.e., the side ofwafer 128 that has been plated) has been cleaned, etching solution is provided throughpipe 1114 to remove barrier layer 1122 (FIG. 7 ). This etching process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to remove barrier layer 1122 (FIG. 7 ). It should be recognized that this step can be omitted whenwafer 1128 does not have abarrier layer 1122. - Step 10. Before, during or after
wafer 1128 is etched, an etching solution can be provided throughinjection pipe 1108 to remove the metal seed layer from the edge ofwafer 1128. -
Step 11. Afterwafer 1128 has been etched, a cleaning solution is provided throughinjection pipes wafer 1128. -
Step 12. Afterwafer 1128 has been cleaned, a drying gas is provided throughinjection pipe 1102. In one embodiment, the drying gas is Nitrogen gas. This process can be performed for any convenient period of time necessary to drywafer 1128. In one embodiment,wafer 1128 is dried for a period of time between about 20 seconds to about 40 seconds, and preferably about 30 seconds. Additionally, in one embodiment, during this process,wafer chuck 1120 is rotated at about 1500 revolutions per minute to about 3500 revolutions per minute, and preferably about 2500 revolutions per minute. -
Step 13. Afterwafer 1128 is dried,wafer chuck 1120 stops.Loading door 1124 is then moved to an unload position, andwafer 1128 is removed fromelectroless plating module 1101.
-
- As alluded to earlier,
electroless plating module 1101 can be integrated into a wafer processing tool. With reference toFIGS. 70A, 70B , and 70C, awafer processing tool 2010 in accordance with one exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown. In this embodiment,wafer processing tool 2010 includes anelectropolishing station 2000, anelectroless plating station 2100,wafer handling stations robot 2220. - As depicted in
FIG. 70B ,electropolishing station 2000 includes five stacked electropolishing receptacles (modules) 2020.Electroless plating station 2100 includes five stackedelectroless plating modules 2120. Accordingly, as many as five wafers can be electropolished and/or electroless plated at one time. It should be recognized, however, thatelectropolishing station 2000 andelectroless plating station 2100 can include any number of electropolishing modules and electroless plating modules depending on the particular application. For example, for a low volume application,electropolishing station 2000 andelectroless plating station 2100 can be configured with oneelectropolishing module 2020 and oneelectroless plating module 2120. Additionally, it should be recognized that the ratio ofelectropolishing modules 2020 toelectroless plating modules 2120 can vary depending on the particular application. For example, in an application where the electropolishing process requires more processing time than the electroless plating process,wafer processing tool 2010 can be configured withmore electropolishing modules 2020 thanelectroless plating modules 2120. Alternatively, in applications where the electroless plating process requires more processing time than the electropolishing process,wafer processing tool 2010 can be configured with moreelectroless plating modules 2120 thanelectropolishing modules 2020. - As also depicted in
FIG. 70B ,electropolishing modules 2020 andelectroless plating modules 2120 are configured as vertical stacks. In this manner, the number of wafers processed can be increased without increasing the footprint of (the amount of floor space occupied by)wafer processing tool 2010. In the increasingly competitive semiconductor industry, increasing the ratio of wafers processed per square feet of fabrication spaced occupied bywafer processing tool 2010 can be advantageous. - In the present embodiment,
wafer processing tool 2010 includes wafer-handling stations handling stations wafer cassette 2160 for holding wafers. In one embodiment,wafer cassette 2160 can include a standard mechanical interface (SMIF) 2320. It should be recognized thatwafer cassette 216 can include any convenient wafer holding and/or carrier apparatus. - In the present embodiment,
robot 2220 is configured to remove an unprocessed wafer fromwafer cassette 2160 and transport the wafer to any one of theelectropolishing modules 2020. After the wafer is electropolished,robot 2220 transports the wafer to any one of theelectroless plating modules 2120. After the wafer is plated, etched, cleaned, and tried,robot 2220 then transports the wafer back towafer cassette 2160. Although asingle wafer cassette 2160 is depicted inFIG. 70 , it should be recognized that wafer-handling stations wafer cassettes 2160. - Additionally, wafer-
handling station handling station wafer cassette 2160. In one configuration, awafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafers is provided at wafer-handling station 2200. The wafers are removed, processed, then returned to thesame wafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200. Prior to the completion of the processing of wafers fromwafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200, anotherwafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafers is provided at wafer-handling station 2210. Once the wafers fromwafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200 are processed, wafer-processing tool 2010 can begin processing the unprocessed wafers fromwafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2210. The processed wafers inwafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200 can then be removed and replaced with yet anotherwafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafers. In this manner, wafer-processing tool 2010 can be operated continuously without unintended interruption. - In another configuration, a
wafer cassette 2160 containing unprocessed wafer can be provided at wafer-handling station 2200. Anempty wafer cassette 2160 can be provided at wafer-handling station 2210. The unprocessed wafers fromwafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2200 can be processed then returned to theempty wafer cassette 2160 at wafer-handling station 2210. This configuration also facilitates continuously operation ofprocessing tool 2010. This configuration, however, has the advantage that one of the twohandling stations wafer cassette 2160 containing processed wafers for one with unprocessed wafers and vice versa. - With reference again to
FIGS. 70B and 70C , wafer-processing tool 2010 includeshousing unit 2300 for housing the various electrical and mechanical components of wafer-processing tool 2010, such as power supplies, filters, wires, plumbing, chemical containers, pumps, valves, and the like. Wafer-processing tool 2010 can also include acomputer 2040 for controlling the operation of wafer-processing tool 2040. More particularly,computer 2040 can be configured with an appropriate software program to implement the processing steps set forth above. - It should be recognized that various modifications can be made to the configuration of wafer-
processing tool 2010 without deviating from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. In this regard, in the following description and associated drawings, various alternative embodiments of the present invention will be described and depicted. It should be recognized, however, that these alternative embodiments are not intended to demonstrate all of the various modifications, which can be made to the present invention. Rather, these alternative embodiments are provided to demonstrate only some of the many possible modifications. - With reference to
FIGS. 71A, 71B , and 71C, a wafer processing tool 4010 in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown. In this embodiment, wafer processing tool 4010 includes an electroplating station 4000, an electroless plating station 4100, an electropolishing station 4500, wafer handling stations 4420, 4440, and 4460, and robots 4220 and 4400. - In the present embodiment, robot 4220 is configured to remove an unprocessed wafer from wafer handling station 4420, 4440, or 4460. Robot 4220 transports the wafer into any one of the electroplating modules 4020 in electroplating station 4000. In electroplating modules 4020, metal layer 121 (
FIG. 1A ) can be formed on barrier layer 122 (FIG. 1A ) or on dielectric layer 123 (FIG. 1A ) using an electroplating process. This process is described in greater detail in copending application Ser. No. 09/232,864, entitled PLATING APPARATUS AND METHOD, filed on Jan. 15, 1999, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference. It should be recognized that although three electroplating modules 4020 are depicted inFIG. 71 , wafer processing tool 4010 can include any number of electroplating modules 4020. - After the wafer is plated, robot 4220 transports the wafer into any one of the electroless plating modules 4120 in electroless plating station 4100. In electroless plating module 4120, the wafer is cleaned, but not replated. Robot 4400 then transports the wafer into any one of the electropolishing modules 4520 in electropolishing station 4500. In electropolishing module 4520, the wafer is electropolished. Robot 4400 then transports the wafer back into electroless plating module 4120. At this point, the wafer is replated, etched, cleaned, and dried. Robot 4220 then returns the wafer to wafer handling station 4420, 4440, or 4460.
- With reference now to
FIGS. 72A, 72B , and 72C, awafer processing tool 5001 in accordance with still another exemplary embodiment of the present invention is shown. In this embodiment,wafer processing tool 5001 includeselectroplating modules 5000, 5002, and 5004, cleaningmodules thermal annealing modules electropolishing modules - As depicted in
FIGS. 72B and 72C ,wafer processing tool 5001 includes support tables 5300, 5500, and 5700, which are supported bysupport members electroplating module 5000,cleaning module 5010,thermal annealing module 5020, andelectropolishing module 5030. Support table 5500 includes electroplating module 5002,cleaning module 5012,thermal annealing module 5022, andelectropolishing module 5032. Support table 5700 includes electroplating module 5004,cleaning module 5014,thermal annealing module 5024, andelectropolishing module 5034. - As also depicted in
FIGS. 72B and 72C ,wafer processing tool 5001 includes rotary tables 5200, 5400, and 5600, which are supported bysupport member 5140. Each rotary table 5200, 5400, and 5600 includes four wafer chuck mechanisms. More particularly, rotary table 5200 includeswafer chuck mechanisms wafer chuck mechanisms wafer chuck mechanisms - A
motor 5048 rotatessupport member 5140, which then rotates rotary tables 5200, 5400, and 5600.Bearings - More particularly, with reference to
FIG. 72A , arobot 5080 transports wafers fromwafer handling station Robot 5080 then transports the wafers into the three stacked wafer chuck mechanisms (FIGS. 5B and 5C ). For example, with reference toFIG. 72C , robot 5080 (FIG. 5A ) can transport unprocessed wafers intowafer chuck mechanisms - With reference to
FIGS. 72B and 72C , rotary table 5200, 5400, and 5600 then rotatewafer chuck mechanisms electroplating modules 5000, 5002, and 5004. As these wafers are being electroplated, robot 5080 (FIG. 72A ) can transport more unprocessed wafers into thewafer chuck mechanisms - After the wafers are electroplated, rotary table 5200, 5400, and 5600 then rotate
wafer chuck mechanisms modules wafer chuck mechanisms electroplating modules 5000, 5002, and 5004. Also,wafer chuck mechanisms FIG. 72A ). - After the wafers are cleaned, rotary table 5200, 5400, and 5600 then rotate
wafer chuck mechanisms thermal annealing modules wafer chuck mechanisms modules wafer chuck mechanisms electroplating modules 5000, 5002, and 5004. Furthermore,wafer chuck mechanisms FIG. 72A ). - In
thermal annealing modules - After the wafers are annealed, rotary table 5200, 5400, and 5600 then rotate
wafer chuck mechanisms electropolishing modules wafer chuck mechanisms thermal annealing modules wafer chuck mechanisms modules wafer chuck mechanisms electroplating modules 5000, 5002, and 5004. - After the wafers are electropolished,
robots chuck mechanisms electroless plating modules FIG. 72B ,robots support member 5046. Also,electroless plating modules support members 5078. - After the wafers are removed from
chuck mechanisms electroless plating modules wafer handling station FIG. 5A ) by robot 5080 (FIG. 72A ). -
Wafer processing tool 5001 also includes ametrology station 5088, which can include various tools to inspect and examine the wafer during or after processing for quality control and to tune the various wafer processing systems. For example,metrology station 5088 can include four-point probes for measuring resistivity of the metal layer after electroplating.Metrology station 5088 can also include a scanning tunneling microscope (STM) or an atomic force microscope (AFM) for measuring the surface profile of the wafer.Metrology station 5088 can further include an optical microscope for measuring surface defects on the wafer. It should be recognized thatmetrology station 5088 can include any combination of these tools or various additional tools depending on the application. -
Wafer processing tool 5001 can also include various additional processing stations depending on the particular application. For example,wafer processing tool 5001 can include a dry or plasma stripping chamber. As described above, when the wafer includes a barrier layer, it is stripped away from the surface of the wafer. Dry or plasma stripping has the advantage that it does not produce many of the corrosion problems generally associated with wet etching. - As stated earlier, although the present invention has been described in conjunction with a number of alternative embodiments illustrated in the appended drawing figures, various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and/or scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to the specific forms shown in the drawings and described above.
Claims (20)
1. A method of monitoring the end-point of an electroplishing process of a metal layer formed on a wafer, comprising:
rotating and translating the wafer;
applying a stream of electrolyte to a first portion of the metal layer to electropolish the first portion, wherein the stream of electrolyte is applied using a nozzle;
obtaining a first measurement of the first portion before the stream of electrolyte is applied to the first portion, wherein the first measurement is obtained using a first sensor disposed adjacent to a first side of the nozzle; and
obtaining a second measurement of the first portion after the stream of electrolyte is applied to the first portion, wherein the second measurement is obtained using a second sensor disposed adjacent to a second side of the nozzle, wherein the first side is opposite the second side of the nozzle, and wherein the nozzle, the first sensor, and the second sensor remain stationary while the wafer is rotated and translated.
2. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
determining an electropolishing rate in a single rotation of the wafer chuck based on the difference between the first and second measurements.
3. The method of claim 2 , further comprising:
adjusting the speed of rotation or translation of the wafer based on the electropolishing rate.
4. The method of claim 2 , further comprising:
adjusting polishing power applied to the stream of electrolyte based on the electropolishing rate.
5. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
obtaining a third measurement of a second portion of the metal layer that was electropolished by the nozzle in a previous rotation of the wafer chuck, wherein the third measurement is obtained using a third sensor disposed adjacent to a third side of the nozzle; and
obtaining a fourth measurement of a third portion of the metal layer that will be electropolished by the nozzle in a subsequent rotation of the wafer chuck, wherein the fourth measurement is obtained using a fourth sensor disposed adjacent to a fourth side of the nozzle, wherein the third side is opposite the fourth side.
6. The method of claim 5 , further comprising:
determining an electropolishing rate of one electropolishing cycle based on the difference between the third and fourth measurements.
7. The method of claim 6 , further comprising:
adjusting the speed of rotation or translation of the wafer chuck based on the electropolishing rate of one electropolishing cycle.
8. The method of claim 7 , further comprising:
adjusting polishing power applied to the stream of electrolyte based on the electropolishing rate of one electropolishing cycle.
9. The method of claim 5 , further comprising:
obtaining a fifth measurement of the first portion while the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion, wherein the fifth measurement is obtained using a fifth sensor disposed within the nozzle.
10. The method of claim 1 , further comprising:
obtaining a fifth measurement of the first portion while the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion, wherein the fifth measurement is obtained using a fifth sensor disposed within the nozzle.
11. An apparatus for monitoring the end-point of an electroplishing process of a metal layer formed on a wafer, comprising:
a wafer chuck configured to hold the wafer;
a drive mechanism connected to the wafer chuck, the drive mechanism configured to rotate and translate the wafer chuck;
a nozzle configured to electroplish the metal layer,
wherein the nozzle is configured to apply a stream of electrolyte;
a first sensor disposed adjacent to a first side of the nozzle,
wherein the first sensor is configured to obtain a first measurement of a first portion of the metal layer before the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion; and
a second sensor disposed adjacent to a second side of the nozzle,
wherein the first side is opposite the second side of the nozzle,
wherein the second sensor is configured to obtain a second measurement of the first portion after the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion, and
wherein the nozzle, the first sensor, and the second sensor are stationary.
12. The apparatus of claim 11 , wherein the difference between the first and second measurements is used to determine an electropolishing rate in a single rotation of the wafer chuck.
13. The apparatus of claim 12 , wherein the electropolishing rate is used to adjust polishing power applied to the stream of electrolyte or the speed of rotation or translation of the wafer chuck.
14. The apparatus of claim 11 , further comprising:
a third sensor disposed adjacent to a third side of the nozzle, wherein the third sensor is configured to obtain a third measurement of a second portion of the metal layer that was electropolished by the nozzle in a previous rotation of the wafer chuck; and
a fourth sensor disposed adjacent to a fourth side of the nozzle, wherein the third side is opposite the fourth side, and wherein the fourth sensor is configured to obtain a fourth measurement of a third portion of the metal layer that will be electropolished by the nozzle in a subsequent rotation of the wafer chuck.
15. The apparatus of claim 14 , wherein the difference between the third and fourth measurements is used to determine an electropolishing rate of one electropolishing cycle.
16. The apparatus of claim 15 , wherein the electropolishing rate of one electropolishing cycle is used to adjust polishing power applied to the stream of electrolyte or the speed of rotation or translation of the wafer chuck.
17. The apparatus of claim 14 , further comprising:
a fifth sensor disposed within the nozzle, the fifth sensor configured to obtain a fifth measurement of the first portion while the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion.
18. The apparatus of claim 11 , further comprising:
a fifth sensor disposed within the nozzle, the fifth sensor configured to obtain a fifth measurement of the first portion while the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion.
19. An apparatus for monitoring the end-point of an electroplishing process of a metal layer formed on a wafer, comprising:
a wafer chuck configured to hold the wafer;
a drive mechanism connected to the wafer chuck, the drive mechanism configured to rotate and translate the wafer chuck;
a nozzle configured to electroplish the metal layer,
wherein the nozzle is configured to apply a stream of electrolyte;
a first sensor disposed adjacent to a first side of the nozzle,
wherein the first sensor is configured to obtain a first measurement of a first portion of the metal layer before the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion;
a second sensor disposed adjacent to a second side of the nozzle, wherein the first side is opposite the second side of the nozzle, and wherein the second sensor is configured to obtain a second measurement of the first portion after the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion; and
a third sensor disposed within the nozzle, the third sensor configured to obtain a third measurement of the first portion while the nozzle applies the stream of electrolyte onto the first portion to electropolish the first portion, wherein the nozzle, the first sensor, the second sensor, and the third sensor are stationary.
20. The apparatus of claim 19 , further comprising:
a fourth sensor disposed adjacent to a third side of the nozzle, wherein the fourth sensor is configured to obtain a third measurement of a second portion of the metal layer that was electropolished by the nozzle in a previous rotation of the wafer chuck; and
a fifth sensor disposed adjacent to a fourth side of the nozzle, wherein the fifth side is opposite the fourth side, and wherein the fifth sensor is configured to obtain a fourth measurement of a third portion of the metal layer that will be electropolished by the nozzle in a subsequent rotation of the wafer chuck.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US11/595,311 US20070052977A1 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2006-11-10 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
Applications Claiming Priority (7)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US9231698P | 1998-07-09 | 1998-07-09 | |
PCT/US1999/015506 WO2000003426A1 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 1999-07-08 | Methods and apparatus for electropolishing metal interconnections on semiconductor devices |
US09/497,894 US6440295B1 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2000-02-04 | Method for electropolishing metal on semiconductor devices |
US09/570,566 US6447668B1 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2000-05-12 | Methods and apparatus for end-point detection |
US10/276,286 US7136173B2 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2001-05-03 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
PCT/US2001/014652 WO2001088229A1 (en) | 2000-05-12 | 2001-05-03 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
US11/595,311 US20070052977A1 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2006-11-10 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
Related Parent Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2001/014652 Continuation WO2001088229A1 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2001-05-03 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
US10/276,286 Continuation US7136173B2 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2001-05-03 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20070052977A1 true US20070052977A1 (en) | 2007-03-08 |
Family
ID=46299138
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/276,286 Expired - Fee Related US7136173B2 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2001-05-03 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
US11/595,311 Abandoned US20070052977A1 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2006-11-10 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US10/276,286 Expired - Fee Related US7136173B2 (en) | 1998-07-09 | 2001-05-03 | Method and apparatus for end-point detection |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US7136173B2 (en) |
Cited By (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20060189497A1 (en) * | 2002-07-30 | 2006-08-24 | Earl Jenevein | Wood preservative |
US20080047827A1 (en) * | 2006-08-28 | 2008-02-28 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for preventing copper peeling in ECP |
US20120270065A1 (en) * | 2010-08-31 | 2012-10-25 | Takamasa Maekawa | Multi-layered structure and manufacturing method thereof |
US20130144420A1 (en) * | 2011-12-01 | 2013-06-06 | Memc Electronic Materials, Spa | Systems For Controlling Surface Profiles Of Wafers Sliced In A Wire Saw |
US20130139801A1 (en) * | 2011-12-01 | 2013-06-06 | Memc Electronic Materials, Spa | Methods For Controlling Displacement Of Bearings In A Wire Saw |
US20130139800A1 (en) * | 2011-12-02 | 2013-06-06 | Memc Electronic Materials, Spa | Methods For Controlling Surface Profiles Of Wafers Sliced In A Wire Saw |
US11050306B2 (en) * | 2018-06-28 | 2021-06-29 | Hioki E.E. Corporation | Power efficiency measuring apparatus |
Families Citing this family (13)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP1436441B2 (en) * | 2001-09-10 | 2012-11-28 | University Of Virginia Patent Foundation | Method for applying metallic alloy coatings and coated component |
US6783657B2 (en) * | 2002-08-29 | 2004-08-31 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Systems and methods for the electrolytic removal of metals from substrates |
US20040040863A1 (en) * | 2002-08-29 | 2004-03-04 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Systems for electrolytic removal of metals from substrates |
WO2005082057A2 (en) * | 2004-02-23 | 2005-09-09 | Acm Research, Inc. | Controlling removal rate uniformity of an electropolishing process in integrated circuit fabrication |
KR100725938B1 (en) * | 2005-05-30 | 2007-06-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus for manufacturing semiconductor device capable of reliable gap-fill processing and method for gap-fill processing using the same |
US20070181441A1 (en) * | 2005-10-14 | 2007-08-09 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Method and apparatus for electropolishing |
US8764961B2 (en) * | 2008-01-15 | 2014-07-01 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Cu surface plasma treatment to improve gapfill window |
US8397215B2 (en) * | 2009-05-18 | 2013-03-12 | National Instruments Corporation | Executing a physical model with multiple physical domains in a web browser |
MX2012002027A (en) * | 2009-08-19 | 2012-05-29 | Alexander Werjefelt | Wave action electric generating system. |
CN104471690B (en) * | 2012-05-24 | 2017-04-19 | 盛美半导体设备(上海)有限公司 | Method and apparatus for pulse electrochemical polishing |
CN105088328B (en) * | 2014-05-07 | 2018-11-06 | 盛美半导体设备(上海)有限公司 | Electrochemical polish liquid feed device |
KR102639119B1 (en) * | 2018-12-31 | 2024-02-20 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Electroplating apparatus and electroplating method using the same |
CN110243813B (en) * | 2019-06-28 | 2021-06-22 | 郑州工业应用技术学院 | Workpiece polishing detection device for machine manufacturing |
Citations (12)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5492594A (en) * | 1994-09-26 | 1996-02-20 | International Business Machines Corp. | Chemical-mechanical polishing tool with end point measurement station |
US5637185A (en) * | 1995-03-30 | 1997-06-10 | Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute | Systems for performing chemical mechanical planarization and process for conducting same |
US5672091A (en) * | 1994-12-22 | 1997-09-30 | Ebara Corporation | Polishing apparatus having endpoint detection device |
US5695601A (en) * | 1995-12-27 | 1997-12-09 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Method for planarizing a semiconductor body by CMP method and an apparatus for manufacturing a semiconductor device using the method |
US5807165A (en) * | 1997-03-26 | 1998-09-15 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method of electrochemical mechanical planarization |
US5948203A (en) * | 1996-07-29 | 1999-09-07 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. | Optical dielectric thickness monitor for chemical-mechanical polishing process monitoring |
US5972162A (en) * | 1998-01-06 | 1999-10-26 | Speedfam Corporation | Wafer polishing with improved end point detection |
US6000996A (en) * | 1997-02-03 | 1999-12-14 | Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd. | Grinding process monitoring system and grinding process monitoring method |
US6045433A (en) * | 1995-05-23 | 2000-04-04 | Nova Measuring Instruments, Ltd. | Apparatus for optical inspection of wafers during polishing |
US6241847B1 (en) * | 1998-06-30 | 2001-06-05 | Lsi Logic Corporation | Method and apparatus for detecting a polishing endpoint based upon infrared signals |
US6285035B1 (en) * | 1998-07-08 | 2001-09-04 | Lsi Logic Corporation | Apparatus for detecting an endpoint polishing layer of a semiconductor wafer having a wafer carrier with independent concentric sub-carriers and associated method |
US6447668B1 (en) * | 1998-07-09 | 2002-09-10 | Acm Research, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for end-point detection |
Family Cites Families (28)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2751344A (en) * | 1949-06-21 | 1956-06-19 | Charles A Kienberger | Electropolisher |
SU463174A1 (en) | 1973-03-09 | 1975-03-05 | Предприятие П/Я Г-4521 | Electrolytic plate treater |
US4021278A (en) * | 1975-12-12 | 1977-05-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Reduced meniscus-contained method of handling fluids in the manufacture of semiconductor wafers |
US4078980A (en) * | 1976-10-01 | 1978-03-14 | National Semiconductor Corporation | Electrolytic chromium etching of chromium-layered semiconductor |
US4304641A (en) * | 1980-11-24 | 1981-12-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Rotary electroplating cell with controlled current distribution |
JPS57171690A (en) | 1981-04-13 | 1982-10-22 | Tokio Osaki | Plating method |
GB8617675D0 (en) | 1986-07-19 | 1986-08-28 | Ae Plc | Deposition of bearing alloys |
JPH01234590A (en) | 1988-03-16 | 1989-09-19 | Toshiba Eng Co Ltd | Partial plating device |
WO1990000476A1 (en) | 1988-07-12 | 1990-01-25 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Planarized interconnect etchback |
US5096550A (en) * | 1990-10-15 | 1992-03-17 | The United States Of America As Represented By The United States Department Of Energy | Method and apparatus for spatially uniform electropolishing and electrolytic etching |
DE4121032A1 (en) * | 1991-06-26 | 1993-01-07 | Schmid Gmbh & Co Geb | DEVICE FOR TREATING PLATE-SHAPED OBJECTS, IN PARTICULAR BOARDS |
US5217586A (en) * | 1992-01-09 | 1993-06-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Electrochemical tool for uniform metal removal during electropolishing |
US5284554A (en) * | 1992-01-09 | 1994-02-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Electrochemical micromachining tool and process for through-mask patterning of thin metallic films supported by non-conducting or poorly conducting surfaces |
JPH05243183A (en) | 1992-02-28 | 1993-09-21 | Nec Corp | Manufacture of semiconductor device |
JPH0625899A (en) * | 1992-07-10 | 1994-02-01 | Nec Corp | Electroplating device |
US5489341A (en) * | 1993-08-23 | 1996-02-06 | Semitool, Inc. | Semiconductor processing with non-jetting fluid stream discharge array |
US5421987A (en) * | 1993-08-30 | 1995-06-06 | Tzanavaras; George | Precision high rate electroplating cell and method |
WO1995020064A1 (en) | 1994-01-24 | 1995-07-27 | Berg N Edward | Uniform electroplating of printed circuit boards |
US5544421A (en) * | 1994-04-28 | 1996-08-13 | Semitool, Inc. | Semiconductor wafer processing system |
US5567300A (en) * | 1994-09-02 | 1996-10-22 | Ibm Corporation | Electrochemical metal removal technique for planarization of surfaces |
US5516412A (en) * | 1995-05-16 | 1996-05-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Vertical paddle plating cell |
US5722875A (en) * | 1995-05-30 | 1998-03-03 | Tokyo Electron Limited | Method and apparatus for polishing |
US5670034A (en) * | 1995-07-11 | 1997-09-23 | American Plating Systems | Reciprocating anode electrolytic plating apparatus and method |
US5620581A (en) * | 1995-11-29 | 1997-04-15 | Aiwa Research And Development, Inc. | Apparatus for electroplating metal films including a cathode ring, insulator ring and thief ring |
US5865984A (en) * | 1997-06-30 | 1999-02-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Electrochemical etching apparatus and method for spirally etching a workpiece |
US6017437A (en) * | 1997-08-22 | 2000-01-25 | Cutek Research, Inc. | Process chamber and method for depositing and/or removing material on a substrate |
US6056869A (en) * | 1998-06-04 | 2000-05-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Wafer edge deplater for chemical mechanical polishing of substrates |
US6395152B1 (en) * | 1998-07-09 | 2002-05-28 | Acm Research, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for electropolishing metal interconnections on semiconductor devices |
-
2001
- 2001-05-03 US US10/276,286 patent/US7136173B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2006
- 2006-11-10 US US11/595,311 patent/US20070052977A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (12)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5492594A (en) * | 1994-09-26 | 1996-02-20 | International Business Machines Corp. | Chemical-mechanical polishing tool with end point measurement station |
US5672091A (en) * | 1994-12-22 | 1997-09-30 | Ebara Corporation | Polishing apparatus having endpoint detection device |
US5637185A (en) * | 1995-03-30 | 1997-06-10 | Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute | Systems for performing chemical mechanical planarization and process for conducting same |
US6045433A (en) * | 1995-05-23 | 2000-04-04 | Nova Measuring Instruments, Ltd. | Apparatus for optical inspection of wafers during polishing |
US5695601A (en) * | 1995-12-27 | 1997-12-09 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Method for planarizing a semiconductor body by CMP method and an apparatus for manufacturing a semiconductor device using the method |
US5948203A (en) * | 1996-07-29 | 1999-09-07 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. | Optical dielectric thickness monitor for chemical-mechanical polishing process monitoring |
US6000996A (en) * | 1997-02-03 | 1999-12-14 | Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd. | Grinding process monitoring system and grinding process monitoring method |
US5807165A (en) * | 1997-03-26 | 1998-09-15 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method of electrochemical mechanical planarization |
US5972162A (en) * | 1998-01-06 | 1999-10-26 | Speedfam Corporation | Wafer polishing with improved end point detection |
US6241847B1 (en) * | 1998-06-30 | 2001-06-05 | Lsi Logic Corporation | Method and apparatus for detecting a polishing endpoint based upon infrared signals |
US6285035B1 (en) * | 1998-07-08 | 2001-09-04 | Lsi Logic Corporation | Apparatus for detecting an endpoint polishing layer of a semiconductor wafer having a wafer carrier with independent concentric sub-carriers and associated method |
US6447668B1 (en) * | 1998-07-09 | 2002-09-10 | Acm Research, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for end-point detection |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20060189497A1 (en) * | 2002-07-30 | 2006-08-24 | Earl Jenevein | Wood preservative |
US20080047827A1 (en) * | 2006-08-28 | 2008-02-28 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for preventing copper peeling in ECP |
US7667835B2 (en) * | 2006-08-28 | 2010-02-23 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for preventing copper peeling in ECP |
US20120270065A1 (en) * | 2010-08-31 | 2012-10-25 | Takamasa Maekawa | Multi-layered structure and manufacturing method thereof |
US20130144420A1 (en) * | 2011-12-01 | 2013-06-06 | Memc Electronic Materials, Spa | Systems For Controlling Surface Profiles Of Wafers Sliced In A Wire Saw |
US20130139801A1 (en) * | 2011-12-01 | 2013-06-06 | Memc Electronic Materials, Spa | Methods For Controlling Displacement Of Bearings In A Wire Saw |
US20130139800A1 (en) * | 2011-12-02 | 2013-06-06 | Memc Electronic Materials, Spa | Methods For Controlling Surface Profiles Of Wafers Sliced In A Wire Saw |
US11050306B2 (en) * | 2018-06-28 | 2021-06-29 | Hioki E.E. Corporation | Power efficiency measuring apparatus |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US7136173B2 (en) | 2006-11-14 |
US20040125384A1 (en) | 2004-07-01 |
US20060221353A9 (en) | 2006-10-05 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US6447668B1 (en) | Methods and apparatus for end-point detection | |
US20070052977A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for end-point detection | |
US6440295B1 (en) | Method for electropolishing metal on semiconductor devices | |
KR100845566B1 (en) | Plating apparatus and method of managing plating liquid composition | |
KR100780257B1 (en) | Polishing method, polishing apparatus, plating method, and plating apparatus | |
US6720263B2 (en) | Planarization of metal layers on a semiconductor wafer through non-contact de-plating and control with endpoint detection | |
US7598175B2 (en) | Apparatus and method for confined area planarization | |
US20050239289A1 (en) | Method for reducing integrated circuit defects | |
CN114959843B (en) | Post-electro-fill module and calibration method for post-electro-fill module | |
KR20040094560A (en) | Apparatus and Method For Electropolishing Metal On Semiconductor Devices | |
Levert et al. | A NOVEL SPIN-ETCH PLANARIZATION PROCESS FOR DUAL-DAMASCENE COPPER INTERCONNECTS |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SANDPIPER CDN, LLC, DELAWARE Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:LEVEL 3 COMMUNICATIONS, LLC;REEL/FRAME:068256/0091 Effective date: 20240531 |